JP5820490B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. And a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player after the variable information display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, variable display is performed by updating or scrolling predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as LCD). There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result (variable display result).

  As an example of the variable display game, the variable display of the display symbol is completely stopped based on the detection of the game ball passing through the starting winning opening (the variable display start condition is satisfied). In some cases, the case where the stop symbol mode (variable display result) is a specific display mode determined in advance is called “big hit”. In this variable display game, when it is a “big hit”, a special electric accessory called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. . Such a state is referred to as a “specific game state” or a “hit game state”. In addition, the predetermined variable display state that may be a “big hit” in the variable display game is “reach” (also referred to as “reach state”), and the variable display state of the display symbol is “reach” There are known gaming machines that perform various production operations.

  As such a gaming machine, for example, when the operation switch is operated within the effective period of the special symbol game, when the remaining effective period exceeds the set value, a special effect of statically displaying the female character within the remaining effective period is provided. It has been proposed to generate a reach action according to the operation content of the operation switch after the remaining effective period has elapsed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-143370 A

  However, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, when the message “You can select a desired reach production with a button” appears, a reach action always occurs regardless of whether the operation switch is valid. It was not possible to give a great difference in the contents of reach production when the operation switch was not operated. As a result, the content of the reach production becomes uniform, and further variations cannot be added to the reach production.

This invention has been made in consideration of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest of Yu technique.

(1) To achieve the above object, a game machine according to a first aspect of the present invention advantageously favorable conditions (such as jackpot gaming state) controllable gaming machine for Yu technique's (e.g. pachinko game machine 1 a, etc.), the a Ru advantageous conditions determined Teisu whether controlled to determine means (e.g., a portion CPU103 performs the special symbol normal processing in step S110), advantageously the by pre Kike' constant means when determining the effect it is not controlled in the state has been made, the reach determining means for determining whether a variable Henhyo shows a reach state (e.g., a portion CPU103 executes the process of step S265～S268), before Kike' based on the determination result by the determination result and the reach determining means by constant means, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern to one of a plurality of types (e.g., CP 103 is a part for executing the variation pattern setting process in step S111) and a notice effect determining means (for example, an effect) for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined notice effect based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining means. a portion like) where the control CPU120 executes the prediction effect setting processing in step S516, and executes the variable display based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining unit, executes the prediction effect by the announcement effect determination unit when the decision to have been made, the effect execution unit configured to execute the prediction effect during variable display (eg effect control CPU120 and portions for performing the decorative during symbol variation processing in step S162), operated by the player a possible operating means (for example, operation buttons 30), wherein the presentation execution section, the player One of the plurality of types of operation effect that instructs the operation of said operating means, when running at different rates depending on the expectations, an operation of the operation means is performed during execution of the announcement attraction, the announcement attraction (For example, when the determination control CPU 120 determines Yes in the process of step S352, the effect image shown in FIG. 70D is displayed). Display is performed, and when a determination of Yes is made in the process of step S357, the effect image shown in FIG. 70E is displayed).
When the first variable display pattern is executed based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining unit, the effect executing unit executes the reach effect in the first mode and the operation effect, and then performs the operation Based on the operation of the means, the reach production mode is developed from the first mode to the second mode, and the second variable display pattern different from the first variable display pattern is executed. Even if the reach effect of one mode is executed and the operation effect is executed, and then the operation means is operated, the mode of reach effect is not developed as the first mode, and the first variable display pattern When the third variable display pattern different from the second variable display pattern is executed, the reach effect of the first aspect is executed and the operation effect is executed. Without running the reach demonstration in the first embodiment, she may be.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention performs the processing of steps S203 to S209 based on the start condition (for example, based on the determination of Yes in step S201 and the determination of No in step S202). Based on the determination of Yes in step S210 and the determination of No in step S211 or the like, the start condition is satisfied (for example, step S231) after the processing in steps S212 to S218 is executed. a variable display device for variable display based on, etc.) is determined as No (e.g. special symbol display device 4A, 4B and, like the image display device 5) in particular the variable display results predetermined After a display result (for example, a big hit symbol or a final stop symbol that becomes a big hit combination) A favorable advantageous conditions (e.g. jackpot gaming state, etc.) for controlling the gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) and for the Ru advantageous conditions determined Teisu whether controlled to determine means (e.g. CPU103 is a portion, and so on) that perform the special symbol normal processing in step S110, before Kike' when determining the effect is not controlled in the advantageous state by the constant section is made, determining whether the variable Henhyo shows a reach state Leach determination means for (for example, a portion CPU103 executes the process of step S265～S268), before Kike' based on a determination result by the determination result and the reach determining means by the constant unit, a plurality of types of variable display pattern a variable display pattern determining means for determining the one of (for example, a portion CPU103 executes the process of step S274~S276), before Kike' Based on the determination result by the means, notification effect determining means for determining whether to execute the notification effect for notifying whether the controlled after advantageous state ended advantageous special game state than the normal gaming state ( For example, when the CPU 103 determines to execute the notification effect by the notification effect determination means, the notification effect is executed during the control of the advantageous state. Production execution means (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the decorative symbol variation processing in step S162) and an operation means (eg, the operation button 30) operable by the player, the production execution means When the operation means is operated during execution of the notification effect, the subsequent notification effect is displayed when the operation is not performed. (For example, the CPU 120 for effect control displays a stop of a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a probable big hit combination when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period in the process of step 614) On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within the button operation effective period, the display of the fixed decorative pattern that is normally a big hit combination is performed).

(3) In order to achieve the above-described object, the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention performs the processing of steps S203 to S209 based on the start condition (for example, based on the determination of Yes in step S201 and the determination of No in step S202). Based on the determination of Yes in step S210 and the determination of No in step S211 or the like, the start condition is satisfied (for example, step S231) after the processing in steps S212 to S218 is executed. a variable display device for variable display based on, etc.) is determined as No (e.g. special symbol display device 4A, 4B and, like the image display device 5) in particular the variable display results predetermined After a display result (for example, a big hit symbol or a final stop symbol that becomes a big hit combination) A favorable advantageous conditions (e.g. jackpot gaming state, etc.) for controlling the gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) and for the Ru advantageous conditions determined Teisu whether controlled to determine means (e.g. CPU103 is a portion, and so on) that perform the special symbol normal processing in step S110, before Kike' when determining the effect is not controlled in the advantageous state by the constant section is made, determining whether the variable Henhyo shows a reach state Leach determination means for (for example, a portion CPU103 executes the process of step S265～S268), before Kike' based on a determination result by the determination result and the reach determining means by the constant unit, a plurality of types of variable display pattern Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S274 to S276), And presentation means for executing the variable display based on the determination result by the display pattern determining means (for example presentation control CPU120 and portions for performing the in decorative symbol variation processing in step S162), which can be operated by the player Operating means (for example, the operation button 30), and executes a first variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β2, the reach effect γ2, etc.) based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining means. In the reach effect, the reach effect is executed in the first mode, and the operation effect for instructing the player to operate the operation means is executed. Thereafter, the operation means is operated. Then, the aspect of the reach effect is developed from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, the CPU 103 for effect control In the decorative pattern variation process of 162, as shown in FIGS. 65 (A) to (D), (F), (G), FIGS. 67 (A) to (E), and FIGS. 68 (A) to (D). When performing a second variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2) different from the first variable display pattern, the reach of the first mode is performed in the reach effect. Even if an effect is executed, the operation effect is executed, and then the operation means is operated, the aspect of the reach effect is not developed as in the first mode (for example, the CPU 103 for effect control is a step). In the decorative symbol variation processing of S162, the effect images shown in FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (F) and FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B) are displayed), the first variable display pattern and the second Different from variable display pattern When executing a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1), the reach effect of the first mode is executed, and the reach effect is executed in the first mode without executing the operation effect. (For example, the effect control CPU 103 displays effect images shown in FIGS. 65A to 65E in the decorative symbol variation process in step S162).

(4) above (1) to the gaming machine according to any one of (3), before Kike' based on a determination result by the determination result and the reach determining means by constant means, variable display pattern type Variable display pattern type determination means (for example, a part that executes the processes of steps S272 and S273 after the CPU 103 executes any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271). The variable display pattern type determining means further comprises a plurality of variable display pattern types (for example, normal CA2-1, corresponding to the reach state) when the reach determining means determines that the reach state is set. (For example, the CPU 103). Executes such processing of steps S272 and S273 after performing the processing of step S270), when a decision to the effect that not the reach state has been made by the reach determining means, specific effect during variable display (eg " A plurality of types of variable display including variable display pattern types (for example, non-reach CA1-4 variation pattern types, etc.) for executing “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “intro”, “development chance end” specific effects, etc.) The pattern type (for example, non-reach CA1-1 to CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to CC1-3, etc.) is determined (for example, the CPU 103 performs the process of step S271). After executing, the processing of steps S272 and S273 is executed), and the variable display pattern determining means When the decision to said reach state is made by means of the variable display pattern, the plurality of types contained in the variable display pattern types determined by the variable display pattern type determination means reach variable display pattern (e.g. Normal PA2-1 to PA2-4, Super PA3-2 to PA3-8, PB3-1, PB3-2, PC3-1, PC3-2 variation pattern, etc.) After setting the loss variation pattern determination table 138B in S274, the processing of steps S275 and S276 is executed), and the reach determination unit determines that the reach state is not set, and the variation pattern type determination unit determines Yes, when it is determined as a variation pattern type for executing the specific effect. The variable display pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to PA1-7) for executing the specific effect (for example, the CPU 103 performs step Corresponding to the determination of the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 in S273, after the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is set in step S274, the processing in steps S275 and S276 is executed).

(5) In the gaming machine described in the above (3), when the execution executing unit executes the first variable display pattern based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining unit, the operation unit is operated. When it is performed, the reach effect mode is developed from the first mode to the second mode (for example, when the determination control CPU 120 determines Yes in the process of step S352, FIG. 67 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (D) are displayed), and when the operation means is not operated, the reach effect is displayed. Executed in a manner that is more disadvantageous than the second mode (for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines YES in the process of step S351, FIG. 65 (E), FIG. 66 (A), (B Perform and display of the effect image shown in shown in).

(6) In the gaming machine according to (3), the presentation execution section, in a manner that depends on the decision result by the previous Kike' constant means, performing the operation effect (e.g. presentation control CPU120, the step S162 In the process of changing the decorative pattern of, according to the variable display result determined in the special symbol normal process of step S110, a red character display of the effect image in the operation effect or a rainbow display is performed).

(7) or in the (3) to the gaming machine according to any one (6), before Kike' constant means controls after the end of the advantageous state to an advantageous special game state than the normal game state determines whether (CPU 103 for example, the a and performing the processing of step S248～S250), the variable display pattern determining means determines to control the special game state by previous Kike' constant means is made The variable display pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types at different ratios depending on whether or not (for example, the CPU 103 sets the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B in step S274, and then performs steps S275 and S276. Process).

  The present invention has the following effects.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, when the operation means is operated during the execution of the notice effect, the notice effect is executed in a different manner from the case where the operation means is not operated. by Rukoto, it is possible to improve the interest of Yu skills.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, when the operation means is operated during the execution of the notification effect, the subsequent notification effect is different from the case where the operation means is not operated. by being executed, thereby improving the amusement of Yu technique.

  According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, when the production control unit executes the first variable display pattern based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determination unit, the reach production is performed in the first mode in the reach production. When the operation effect is instructed to the player to operate the operation means, the reach effect is developed from the first mode to the second mode based on the operation of the operation unit. On the other hand, when the second variable display pattern is executed, the reach effect of the first aspect is executed, and even if the operation of the previous operation means is performed, the aspect of the reach effect is developed as the first aspect. do not do. On the other hand, when the third variable display pattern is executed, the reach effect of the first mode is executed, and the reach effect is executed in the first mode without executing the operation effect. In this way, by providing the case where the operation effect is executed and the case where the operation effect is not executed in the reach effect, the reach effect corresponding to the player who operates the operation means can be executed, while the player who does not operate the operation means is provided. Since the corresponding reach production can also be executed, the variation of the reach production can be diversified, and the reach production that matches the player's preference can be executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine described in (4) above, the variable display pattern type determining means provides a specific effect during the variable display of the identification information in response to the determination that the reach determining means does not enter the reach state. One of a plurality of variable display pattern types including the variable display pattern type to be executed is determined. At this time, in response to the variable display pattern type having been determined to execute the specific effect, the variable display pattern determining means uses the variable display pattern of the identification information as a plurality of types of non-display for executing the specific effect. One of the reach variable display patterns is determined. Thereby, even when the variable display state of the identification information does not become the reach state, it is possible to execute a specific effect so that a variety of effects can be performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.
Further, the variable display pattern type determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display pattern types corresponding to the reach state in response to the determination that the reach state is set to the reach state. A variable display pattern type including a variable display pattern type for executing a specific effect is determined in response to the determination that the reach state is not set by the reach determination unit. Then, the variable display pattern determining means responds to the decision to reach the reach state by the reach determining means, and the plurality of types of reach included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. Corresponding to the decision to not reach, while deciding to be one of the variable display patterns, and to the variable display pattern type for executing a specific effect by the variable display pattern type decision means Then, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns for executing a specific effect. As described above, the variable display pattern type determination unit and the variable display pattern determination unit make different determinations depending on whether or not the reach determination unit determines to reach the reach state. Therefore, as the numerical data indicating the random value used for determining the variable display pattern type, common numerical data can be used regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, and the variable display pattern of the identification information As the numerical data indicating the random value used for determining the value, common numerical data can be used regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the amount of program by reducing the amount of processing in the random number update processing executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value.

  In the gaming machine described in (5) above, the effect execution means executes the first variable display pattern based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determination means. When the operation means is operated, the reach effect is performed. While the above aspect is developed from the first aspect to the second aspect, when the operation means is not operated, the reach effect is executed in a disadvantageous manner than the second aspect. This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the player is in an unfavorable state by not operating the operating means, and thus can enhance the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine described in the above (6), the effect execution means stirs the player's motivation corresponding to the operation of the operation means by executing the operation effect in a manner corresponding to the determination result by the prior determination means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine described in (7) above, the variable display pattern determining means determines the variable display pattern at a different rate depending on whether or not the prior determination means determines to control the special gaming state. Thus, since the player can be given a different sense of expectation for being controlled in the special game state depending on the manner in which the reach effect has been developed, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion production | presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the number of times of large winning a prize opening | release opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory increase display process. It is a figure which shows the operation example in a pending | holding memory | storage display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, a decorative design or color design that is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified in a decorative design display area or a color design display area that is a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three. (Also referred to as “4th symbol”) is variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative design and the color design is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image indicating a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are arranged. When the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol (for example, update of the display color) is started in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The color symbols variably displayed in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as it is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display is based on the fact that the game ball has entered (starting winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. This occurs when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold indicator LED 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a predetermined solenoid for a normal electric accessory (normally A second start winning opening is provided. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball is unlikely to enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid is turned on, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the operation is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second special condition game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in a round-two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a special gaming state such as a short-time state, or a gaming state other than the small hit gaming state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset). In the same manner as in the case where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is This is usually referred to as a big hit symbol (also referred to as a “non-probable big hit symbol”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, or after the two round jackpot state is over based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, As one of the special game states different from the normal game state, for example, the special figure change time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability change state (high probability game state) in which probability change control (probability change control) is continuously performed is controlled. Is done. In this probability change state, the variable display result of each special figure game and the decorative symbol variable display is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result is a “hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even if the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability change state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot game state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” The second start condition is easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening, such as control for making the time longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L is based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. At 5C and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started, and, for example, the fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle” are stopped and displayed (derived display). Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, there may be included one that stops and displays a decorative symbol that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol simultaneously.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The decorative display variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such changes in the character image display, the background image display mode, and the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, “development opportunity”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more decorative symbol display areas ( For example, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “ 2 ”), the decorative symbols are changed again in the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R), and then stopped. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. The effect display for changing the decorative design again (pseudo continuous change) at 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stopped display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Intro”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, Before the confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (final stop display) at 5C and 5R, for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction portion of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunities”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”, and then all the decorative symbols are displayed. After 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the predetermined display effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. The As an example, in the specific effect of “Development chance eyes”, the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “end of development opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all decorative symbols are displayed. In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols predetermined as development opportunities is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying a predetermined character image or a message image, a display pattern other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is used. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable.

  In the “character display” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then two or more decorative symbols are displayed. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the area (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), a character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. An effect display to be displayed is performed.

  In the “step-up image” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then two or more decorative symbols are displayed. Before temporarily displaying decorative symbols in the display area, there may be an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. . In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the notice display of “mail display”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the area, in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player, the effect operation such as changing the effect image display in the display area of the image display device 5 is changed. An effect display is performed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There is a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination or a fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is used as the confirmed decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this way, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined probability variation big hit combination and May be displayed in a stopped manner. Here, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect is The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is displayed without being executed is referred to as the variable display mode of “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the game is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15th round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect different from the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variable” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second positive change”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the variable change state is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the normal jackpot combination fixed decoration Symbols may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect. Is not executed, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is referred to as the “third probability change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. . Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  As described above, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed symbol design that is a probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol variable display. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “third probability variation”, the fixed decoration which is normally a big hit combination in the variable display of the decorative pattern is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbols. That is, the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, the confirmed decorative pattern that is normally a big hit combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, and a predetermined non- A fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination is stopped and displayed, or a fixed decorative pattern that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. In some cases, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the ornament is displayed in the same manner as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”. After the variable display of the symbol is performed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. There are cases where the display is stopped, or a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols on which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3 (C) is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “accurate”, and the variable display mode is “small”. When it is “winning”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In other words, when the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “probable”. Determine. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues. If a decision is made to end the probability change state or the short-time state corresponding to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is returned after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, the decorative symbols that are normally the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. After that, for example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbols are changed again, and the decorative symbols that become the probable big hit combination are changed. Any of the decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the decoration symbol again, a promotion promotion failure during change is performed in which the fixed decoration symbol which is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display result when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds. After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, the color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5 A corresponding to the variable symbol special symbol display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4 A. The variable display is performed, and the variable display of the symbol in the “right” color symbol display area 5B is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is called. Then, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, the fixed color symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. The As an example, when a special symbol indicating a number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “yellow” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. In addition, when any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”, which are the 15-round jackpot symbols, is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, “Left In the color symbol display area 5A, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the determined color symbol. Furthermore, when a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, it is confirmed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. A color design indicating “blue” as a color design is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “green” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. If any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, In the color symbol display area 5B, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color symbol. When a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, the fixed color symbol is displayed in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. As a result, the color design indicating “blue” is stopped and displayed.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is mounted with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the turn-on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22 </ b> A and 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a pre-determined result indicating whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, Different EXT corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative display variable display mode in the case of “big hit” is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability” Data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “first probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “second probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

  A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a designation command for the 15th round big hit opening the big prize opening for designating the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize winning opening is open in each round corresponding to the 15th round big hit state. Command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH corresponds to the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for sudden / small hits that designates the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening is open in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state. This is a command that is designated after opening the big prize opening for small hits. For example, in the command for opening the big winning opening for the accuracy / small hit and the command specifying after opening the big winning opening, the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big hit state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH is used to display the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A and the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining the reach 2. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit" or not. This is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the random display value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise probability” Is a random number value used for determining one of the big hit types as the plurality of types of specific variable display types, for example, taking a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number value MR3 is in the range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “251”. Take.

  FIG. 6 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is "non-reach". 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. 9. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-8, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PB5-1 to super PB5-4, super PC4-1 and super PC4-2, super PD1-1 and super PD1-2, super PE1 -1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-2 and Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3-1 to Special PG3-3 Is prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 8A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 8B. . The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine. The first special figure display result determination table 130 is a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 20 is off or on. Are set data (determination data) or the like associated with (assigned to) big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, or loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B determines whether to assign the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. Data.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. The jackpot type determination table 131 shows that when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” and “surprise probability”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is composed of decision data assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 (the jackpot type buffer value) based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. It may include table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “00” to “04” corresponding to the big hit type.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, for determining the big hit type for the big hit type of “surprise” depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. The assignment of the random value MR2-1 is different. That is, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the value in the range of “83” to “100” of the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to (F) and FIGS. 11 (A) to (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on the determination result of the jackpot type, it is selected as a use table. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprising probability”. The random number value MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-4, super CA3-6 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1, special CA4. -2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2.

  Here, as an example, focusing on the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the big hit shown in FIG. 10A used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. The normal variation pattern type determination table 132A and the large variation pattern type determination table 132B for big hits shown in FIG. 10B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation” include normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is selected. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. In this way, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the allocation of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132H, 132I used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise”, such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the big hit change pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. Thus, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H and 132I (selected when “surprise probability”) are compared with each other, pachinko games Determine the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type according to whether the gaming state in the machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state. Are different random value assignment of MR3 of, also, may be assigned a random number value MR3 for determining variation pattern type for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 12B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 12C, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132I for use. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 10 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 11 (B), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing”. 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C includes a random number MR2-2 for determination of reach as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR2-2 for reach determination. Are assigned to the non-reach HA1-2 decision result. Further, in response to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than “ A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the reach determination random numbers MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative design is determined to be the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is configured by data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2 to super CA2-4, and super CB2-1.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 14 (A), “1” ˜ While the value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, the other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 to super CA2-4. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” among the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that the reach determination random number MR 2-2 corresponds to the case where the total pending storage number is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134 A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”. The determination result of the reach HA2-3 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is not set to the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 16, 17A, and 17B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is used according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-4, super CA3-6 to super CA3-8. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of the super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, and the variation pattern type is selected as the special CA4-1. The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137C has a random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  In the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 16, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA3-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA 3-2, a random pattern MR4 for determining a variation pattern is added to the variation pattern for executing reach effect α1 and reach effect α2 such as super PA4-1 to super PA4-8. Is assigned. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA3-3, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 such as super PB4-1 to super PB4-4. Also, corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is selected, the variation for executing the reach effect γ1 such as the super PB4-1 to the super PB4-4, the super PC4-1, the super PD1-1, and the super PD1-2. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-6, the variation pattern is determined for the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ2 such as Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-4, Super PE1-1, Super PE1-2. The random value MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-7, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is included in the variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “Development Chance” such as Super PC 4-1 and Super PC 4-2. Assigned. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-8, the variation pattern determining variation is changed to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 via the roulette chance such as Super PD4-1 and Super PD4-2. The numerical value MR4 is assigned.

  Further, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137B shown in FIG. 17A, the reach effect γ1 such as super PB4-1 to super PB4-4 is executed corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CB3-1. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-2, the variation pattern determining random number value MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern passing through the roulette chance such as the super PD4-1 and the super PD4-2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CB3-3, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 such as super PB4-1 to super PB4-4. Yes. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-4, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is included in the variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “expansion chance” such as the super PC 4-1 and the super PC 4-2. Assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CB 3-5, the variation pattern for determining the variation pattern is changed to the variation pattern in which the reach effect γ2 is executed via the roulette chance such as the super PE 1-1 and the super PE 1-2. The numerical value MR4 is assigned.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern depending on whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table, and the loss pattern is determined according to the determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2 to super CA2-4, and super CB2-1. The variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative pattern variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative pattern variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 19, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, a specific effect in which a value in the range of “1” to “100” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “end of development chance eyes” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach in response to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “lost” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and perform an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1- of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1”, and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “5” to “8”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 19, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of super CA2-4, random number value MR4 for determining the change pattern is assigned to the change pattern for executing reach effect β2 such as super PB3-6 to super PB3-9.

  In addition, for example, variation patterns for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” such as super-PA3-4, super-PA3-8, super-PB3-4, and super-PB3-9, the pseudo-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after being broken. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, it corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern determining table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the variation variation determination table 138B. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-9 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β2, the variation pattern determining table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-4 in the variation variation determination table 138B. The random value MR4 is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1 and super CA2-2 to super CA2-4, any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned. In addition, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1 in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern is determined for the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 such as the super PA4-1 to the super PA4-8. A value in the range of “75” to “138” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2 to which the random number value MR4 is assigned, among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. On the other hand, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 in which the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 such as the super PB4-1 to the super PB4-4. Of the random number value MR3 for determination, a value in the range of “139” to “241” that is larger than the number of random number values assigned to the super CA 3-2 is assigned. Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 10B, “39” to “70” of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with respect to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2. Is assigned a value in the range. On the other hand, a random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 such as super PB4-1 to super PB4-4, super PC4-1, super PD1-1, and super PD1-2. The CA3-4 variation pattern type is assigned a value in the range of “71” to “241” that is larger than the number of random number values allocated to the super CA 3-2 among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. ing. Furthermore, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 10C, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2.

  In addition, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 10E, for the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2, among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, “13” to “13”. A value in the range of “70” is assigned. On the other hand, the variation pattern type of the super CB3-1 in which the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 such as the super PB4-1 to the super PB4-4, the super PD4-1, For the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-2 in which the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 such as PD4-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Of these, a value in the range of “71” to “241”, which is larger than the number of random number values assigned to the super CA 3-2, is assigned. In the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 11A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2. With such a setting, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio that the reach effect γ1 and the reach effect γ2 are executed rather than the ratio that the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed. Is higher.

  On the other hand, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 14A, the reach effects α1, such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. With respect to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in which the variation pattern determining random value MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, “129” to “129” among the variation pattern type determining random number MR3. A value in the range of “225” is assigned. On the other hand, the fluctuation of the super CA 2-3 in which the random value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as the super PB3-1 to the super PB3-5, the super PC 3-3, and the super PC 3-4. For the pattern type and the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-4 in which the variation pattern determination random number MR4 is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β2 such as the super PB 3-6 to the super PB 3-9 A value in the range of “226” to “241”, which is smaller than the number of random values assigned to the super CA 2-2 among the random values MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, is assigned. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “171” to “229” is included in the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for the variation pattern type of the super CA2-2. Assigned. On the other hand, for the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 and the variation pattern type of the super CA2-4, the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2 in the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is larger than the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2. A small value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned. Further, in response to the determination result of the reach HA 2-3, the value in the range of “183” to “233” is included in the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with respect to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-2. Assigned. On the other hand, for the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 and the variation pattern type of the super CA2-4, the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2 in the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is larger than the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2. A small value in the range of “234” to “241” is assigned.

  In addition, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B illustrated in FIG. 14B, the variable pattern type determination random number value MR3 “82” to “82” for the variation pattern type of the super CA2-2. A value in the range of “159” is assigned. On the other hand, for the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 and the variation pattern type of the super CA2-4, the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2 in the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is larger than the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2. A small value in the range of “160” to “191” is assigned. In the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 14C, “111” to “207” of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with respect to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-2. Is assigned a value in the range. On the other hand, for the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 and the variation pattern type of the super CA2-4, the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2 in the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is larger than the number of random number values assigned to the super CA2-2. A small value in the range of “208” to “241” is assigned. With such a setting, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio that the reach effect γ1 and the reach effect γ2 are executed rather than the ratio that the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed. Is higher. With such a setting, when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, and when it is determined that the variable display mode is the reach mode, the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed according to the ratio. However, the ratio at which the reach effect β1 and the reach effect β2 are executed is lower.

  Here, in the production operations in reach production α1 and reach production α2, a production image of the first mode in which the teammate character and the enemy character face each other is displayed, while the teammate character and the enemy character battle each other. The effect image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the production operations of reach production β1, reach production β2, reach production γ1, and reach production γ2, a first-type production image in which the teammate character and the enemy character face each other is displayed, and the teammate character and the enemy are displayed. An effect image of the second mode in which a character fights can be displayed. For this reason, in the effect operation in the reach effect, the reliability (variable display result is “big hit” when the effect image of the second mode in which the teammate character and the enemy character fight is displayed rather than when it is not displayed. Is likely to become). Accordingly, the second mode in which the teammate character and the enemy character fight is an advantageous mode for the player than the first mode in which the teammate character and the enemy character face each other.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. 20, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are set as the hold data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are set as the hold data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game ball is stored in association with the hold number according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 41 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 42, which process should be selected and executed is instructed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in the ordinary symbol process shown in step S16 of FIG. 41 or the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 49 executed for controlling the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. .

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure fluctuation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal map change timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time which is the execution time of the normal game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, and the like.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the jackpot type buffer, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. The buffer value corresponding to the determination result of which to be determined is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 9, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (hit type buffer value) is set to “00”. When the type is “first probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “02” and the big hit type is In the case of “third probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “03”, and in the case of the big hit type “surprise”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “04”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination Random number SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance, random values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution Random number value SR5, random number values SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type, random value SR8- for determining the first to third notice patterns Numerical data indicating each of 1 to SR8-3 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 includes all of these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3. Or what is necessary is just to count numerical data which shows a part. The effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 40, for example, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 are counted. You may do it. Further, when the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-. 3, numerical data representing all of SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used to determine the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Values in the range of “1” to “101” are used. Take.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is the promotion effect during the change when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random values SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns are specified corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”. It is a random value used to determine the production pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and values in the range of “1” to “150” are used. Take. The random number value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern when executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to decide whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to decide one of a plurality of kinds of the notice pattern types prepared in advance when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used for determining any one of a plurality of types of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “character display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to decide the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to decide the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop as shown in FIGS. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22 (A) is a final left symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22B is a final right symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C is a final final symbol that is a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 23. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. 3 is made up of determination data and the like assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols that become the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22 (B), the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is the same as the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. Further, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3 (C), random numbers SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are provided in the portions that are the chances of random chance TC1 to TC4, and in the portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance item TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C when a specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed. 5R, the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, which are the final decorative symbols, are determined based on the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbols. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, as tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 25 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the finalized symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a decorative symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 25 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -3 is a table that is referred to to determine -3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ When the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. The left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and then the final stop symbol determination table 162B is The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or one of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. The super PA3, the super PA3-4, the super PB3-1, the super PB3-9, the super PC3-1, the super PC3-4, and the special PG2-3. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to a symbol difference “−2”, “−1”, “+1” in accordance with any of the fluctuation patterns of −5 to super PA3-8. , Data for determination to be assigned to “+2”.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 163A to 163C are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 26 (A) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the fixed ornament symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “of the normal symbol that is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 26 (B) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 26 (C) includes the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4 in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. -2 and FZ4-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols as one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. is there. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A to 164C shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. Yes. In the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 27A, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern slips TP1 based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PB3-2, Super PB3-7, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special A random value SR6- for determining the first specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 6 and 7) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a change pattern of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. 1 is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific production pattern of slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, By temporarily stopping the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then rapidly changing the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, In the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol display area 5L of the “left” is re-fluctuated at high speed and then stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display area 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are redisplayed in the decorative pattern display area 5R. In the decorative symbol display area 5R, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the decorative symbol display area 5L of the “left” is redisplayed at a low speed and then stopped to display “left”. In the decorative symbol display area 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 27B simulates the specific effect pattern based on the random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of the series TP2-1 to the pseudo series TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PB3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super The random value SR6 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 6 and 7) in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, such as the change patterns of PB5-4 and special PG1-3. -2 is made up of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then changed again. The total re-variation display operation to be performed (pseudo-variation) is performed once until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the all-revariable display operation is performed twice before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by determining the specific effect pattern to any one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3 using the specific effect pattern determination table 164B, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is determined. be able to.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 27C indicates the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PB3-8, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 6 and 7) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set to intro TP3. -1 to intro TP3-3 are made up of determination data to be assigned to specific production patterns.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. 40 is “1” to “3”. Accordingly, the assignment of the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to the specific effect patterns of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 corresponding to a plurality of types of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to “1” when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to “2” when it is determined as intro TP3-2. When it is determined to be intro TP3-3, it is set to “3”. When the previous effect buffer value is “1”, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-1, and the previous effect buffer value is “2”. In some cases, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-2, and when the previous effect buffer value is "3", the intro TP3-3 is 3 The random value SR6-3 for determining the specific effect pattern is not assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 28A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 28A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A, the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is changing depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result with the variable promotion effect, and the promotion promotion during the variable is failed. The production will be executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, a part of the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the rest is determined without the changing promotion effect. Assigned to the result. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion success during the change and the change promotion during the change Any failure production will not be executed.

  In the jackpot promotion promotion execution execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 28B, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, it is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 as a jackpot. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion success production or a big hit promotion promotion production. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result with the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability change” or “second probability change”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the jackpot promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion Both the successful performance and the jackpot promotion failure production will not be executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Assigned to the decision result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect is executed.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 is a temporary stop symbol shown in, for example, FIGS. 29A to 29D as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development opportunity temporary change according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are temporary stop symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is a decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the slip / development chance temporary stop symbol is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “1” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to “8” is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has a decorative symbol pattern that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has a decorative symbol symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4. Contains decision data to be assigned to.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 30A to 30D are used as tables for determining decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-9, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. Here, for example, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Becomes “1” when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” when the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed twice before (“pseudo continuous variation”). By the time the pseudo continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and executed is executed, the variation of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the temporary temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the temporary symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as a right symbol to be stopped and selected as a use table for determining a middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C Is done. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB3-9, super PB4-4, super PB5-4. When the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is a left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and right temporary stop symbol, which is a right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. KZ2-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-9, Super PB4-4, Special PG1 -3 when the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” in response to the fact that it is any one of “-3” Left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, and right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The medium temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C, is selected as a use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB3-9, super PB4-4, super PB5-4. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the “left” ornament In the symbol display area 5L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, " It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 30B are respectively the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2 according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of 3 is determined data assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by the combination of -3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 30C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 30D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, the pseudo continuous symbol TP2-1 to the pseudo continuous symbol TP2-3 by the specific effect pattern. In accordance with the number of executions of the variation, the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for each variation are displayed in the pseudo consecutive chance eye GC1. ~ GC8 can be determined.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 32 as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 has a chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols which become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for time is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. ing.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 33 as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left center right that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination that is a jackpot combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type. In the notice pattern type determination table 170, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PC1-1, or non-reach PA1-3. , Non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-6, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-2, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PB3 -3, super PB3-8, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, depending on the case of a variation pattern other than these variation patterns, the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is It is composed of determination data assigned to the notice pattern types of no notice or notice CY1 to CY3.

  Here, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PB3-8, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, Corresponding to the case of a variation pattern (see FIGS. 6 and 7) in which a specific effect of “Intro” is executed, such as Super PB 4-3 and Super PB 5-3, a random value SR7 for determining a notice pattern type is set. All are assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of “Intro”, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then within a short time. When the effect display in the specific effect is started and the notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, a random number value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is assigned so that there is always no notice in the case of a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “Intro” is executed. The notice effect in which the specific effect of "" and the execution period overlap each other can be prevented from being executed.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, notification pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 35, 36, and 37 as tables for determining any of the plurality of types of notification patterns. When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, the notice pattern determination table 171A indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP1-1 to notice YP1 based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171A determines the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without decision, or for the decision data assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of “character display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “character display” notice effect, a character image corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  When the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, the notice pattern determination table 171B indicates that there is no notice or the notice pattern is given as notice YP2-1 to notice YP2 based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. -4 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171B determines the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without decision, or data for decision assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, etc. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  When the notification pattern type is determined to be the notification CY3, the notification pattern determination table 171C indicates that there is no notification or a notification pattern based on the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notification pattern or the notification patterns YP3-1 to YP3. -3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. The notice pattern determination table 171C determines the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without any notice, or the decision data assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, etc. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the user to operate the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then the notice YP 3-1 to the notice is issued in response to the operation button 30 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3, if the operation button 30 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 30 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 37, the random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Of these, values in the range of “1” to “170” are assigned without notice. On the other hand, the random number SR8-3 having a smaller number than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state is not notified. Assigned to. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In the other variation patterns that reach the reach state, the random display value SR8− for determining the third notice pattern depends on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). The assignment of 3 is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without notice. In other words, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared to the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is the reach state. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. Higher reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is higher, while the proportion of the decorative display variable display mode is a reachable variation pattern. The ratio of executing a high-priority notice effect is low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 38, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 39A, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. It is included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 38 (A), the display area of the image display device 5 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started to when the final ornament symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, effect display operations for reach effects, and effect display operations for specific effects as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effects according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  As an example, the symbol variation pattern table 180 stores a symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 3-1 corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-1. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 3-1 displays the effect image in the reach effect α 1 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-1. In addition, the symbol variation pattern table 180 stores the symbol variation control patterns of the super CPA 3-5-1 and the super CPA 3-5-2 corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 3-5-1 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5, and instructs the player to operate the operation button 30 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. The effect image of the reach effect α2 accompanied by the operation effect is displayed. In the effect image in the operation effect, the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in red. The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 3-5-2 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5, and displays an operation effect that instructs the player to operate the operation button 30 without displaying an effect image in the specific effect. The effect image of the reach effect α2 is displayed. In the effect image in this operation effect, the characters “Press the button!” Are displayed in gradation (rainbow display) with seven colors of rainbow.

  In addition, the symbol variation pattern table 180 stores a symbol variation control pattern of the super CPB 3-1 corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 3-1. Here, the design variation control pattern of the super CPB 3-1 displays the effect image in the reach effect β 1 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 3-1. In addition, in the symbol variation pattern table 180, super CPB 3-6-1, super CPB 3-6-2, super CPB 3-6-3, super CPB 3-6-4 corresponding to the variation pattern of super PB 3-6. A symbol variation control pattern is stored. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPB 3-6-1 instructs the player to operate the operation button 30 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 3-6. An effect image of reach effect β2 until the operation effect ends is displayed. In the effect image in this operation effect, the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in red. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 3-6-2 has an operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 3-6. The effect image of reach effect β2 until the end is displayed, and in the effect image in this operation effect, the characters “Press the button!” Are displayed in gradation (rainbow display) with seven colors of rainbow. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 3-6-3 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PB 3-6, and the reach effect β2 when the operation of the operation button 30 is detected without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. The effect image is displayed. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 3-6-4 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PB 3-6, and the reach effect when the operation button 30 is not detected without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. An effect image of β2 is displayed.

  Furthermore, the symbol variation pattern table 180 stores the symbol variation control patterns of the super CPA 4-1-1 and the super CPA 4-1-2 in correspondence with the variation pattern of the super PA4-1. Here, the design variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-1-1 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PA4-1, after displaying the effect image in the reach effect α1 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. The effect image in the changing promotion effect is displayed. The pattern change control pattern of the super CPA 4-1-2 is changing after the effect image in the reach effect α1 is displayed without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the change pattern of the super PA4-1. The effect image in the promotion effect is not displayed. In addition, the symbol variation pattern table 180 includes super CPA 4-5-1-1, super CPA 4-5-1-2, super CPA 4-5-2-1, super, corresponding to the variation pattern of super PA 4-5. The symbol fluctuation control pattern of CPA4-5-2-2 is stored. Here, the design variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-1-1 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5, and the player operates the operation button 30 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. After displaying the effect image of the reach effect α2 accompanied by the operation effect to be instructed, the effect image in the promotion effect during change is displayed. In the effect image in this operation effect, the text “Press the button!” Is red. Is displayed. The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-1-2 displays the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5. Without displaying the effect image of the change promotion effect after the effect image of the reach effect α2 accompanied by the operation effect instructing the operation of the operation button 30 to the player is displayed. , "Press the button!" Is displayed in red. The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-2-1 is an operation for instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5. After displaying the effect image of the reach effect α2 with the effect, the effect image in the changing promotion effect is displayed. In the effect image in this operation effect, the characters "Press the button!" Displayed (rainbow display). The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-2-2 is such that the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-1-1 displays an effect image in a specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5. Without displaying the effect image of the change promotion effect after the effect image of the reach effect α2 accompanied by the operation effect instructing the operation of the operation button 30 to the player is displayed. , "Press the button!" Is displayed in gradation with 7 colors of rainbow (rainbow display).

  In addition, the symbol variation pattern table 180 stores the symbol variation control patterns of the super CPB 4-1-1 and the super CPB 4-1-1 corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 4-1. Here, after displaying the effect image in the reach effect γ1 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the change pattern of the super PB4-1, the symbol change control pattern of the super CPB4-1-1. The effect image in the changing promotion effect is displayed. The pattern variation control pattern of the super CPB 4-1-1 is changing after the effect image in the reach effect γ 1 is displayed without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 4-1. The effect image in the promotion effect is not displayed. Also, in the symbol variation pattern table 180, corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB5-1, super CPB5-1-1, super CPB5-1-2, super CPB5-1-3-1, super CPB5-1. The symbol variation control pattern of 3-2, super CPB5-1-4-1, and super CPB5-1-4-2 is stored. Here, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPB 5-1-1 instructs the player to operate the operation button 30 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 5-1. The effect image of reach effect γ2 until the operation effect ends is displayed. In the effect image in this operation effect, the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in red. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 5-1-2 has an operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 without displaying the effect image in the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PB 5-1. The effect image of the reach effect γ2 until the end is displayed. In the effect image in this operation effect, the characters “Press the button!” Are displayed in gradation (rainbow display) with seven colors of rainbow. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 5-3-1 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PB 5-1 and is reached when the operation button 30 is detected without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. After displaying the effect image of effect γ2, the effect image in the changing promotion effect is displayed. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB5-1-3-2 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PB5-1, and the reach when the operation button 30 is detected without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. After displaying the effect image of the effect γ2, the effect image in the changing promotion effect is not displayed. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 5-1-1 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PB 5-1 when the operation button 30 is not detected without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. The effect image of reach effect γ2 is displayed. The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 5-1-2-2 corresponds to the variation pattern of the super PB 5-1 when the operation button 30 is not detected without displaying the effect image in the specific effect. The effect image of reach effect γ2 is not displayed.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 39 (A), data indicating the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of the notice pattern. However, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations corresponding to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP1-1 to notice CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4. . Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 displays the first character image corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 displays the first character image and the second character image corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 displays the first character image and the third character image corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4 displays the first to third character images corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-4.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. . The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect Exit. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. After switching to the effect image, the notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. -2 notice effect control pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1, and the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “mail display” is detected. Display. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “mail display” is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 displays an effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of "mail display" is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 displays an effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of "mail display" is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 displays an effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “mail display” is detected, corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 in the notice effect of “mail display” is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 39B, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control pattern. It only has to be done. Each effect control pattern includes an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. The contents of various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 40, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 40 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is generated from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 41 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4 and the like used on the main board 11 side by software is executed. (Step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 41 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 43, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may identify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S204). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 41 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S206, for example, by adding 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the total reserved memory number is set to 1. Add (step S207). Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S208). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S209). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 41 after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the process of step S209 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. Is determined (step S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the on state (step S210; Yes), it corresponds to the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S211). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the value of the second reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S211 (step S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S213). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 41 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Then, “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S217). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S218). . The reserved memory count notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 41 after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 42 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol, etc. is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. A decision is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process is based on the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination result of whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach state, etc. Thus, a process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the special figure variation time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag is set. The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of big prize opening times. As an example, when the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15 round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to a predetermined solenoid should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the maximum value of the number of times that the big prize opening is opened is “0” because the variable display result is “small hit”, and the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened is set to “0. “5 seconds” may be set.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to a predetermined solenoid may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed by the electric parts for the effect such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 103 first sums the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number based on the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number as a value is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number count value, the total reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C receives the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “first” (step S234; first), the first special figure hold storage unit 151A stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S235). At this time, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory number count value, the first reserved memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S236). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the special fluctuation designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the fluctuation special figure) The designated buffer value) is set to “1” (step S237).

  After the process of step S237 is executed, a first table shown in FIG. 8A is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. The figure display result determination table 130A is selected and set (step S238). For example, in the process of step S238, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The CPU 103 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S235 is the big hit determination value data. (Step S239).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S239 (step S239; No), the numerical value indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S235. It is determined whether or not the data matches the small hit determination value data (step S240). At this time, if it matches with the small hit determination value data (step S240; Yes), the small hit flag is set to the on state (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “second” (step S234; second), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S242). At this time, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, the second reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S243). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S244).

  After the process of step S244 is executed, a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8B is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. 130B is selected and set (step S245). For example, in the process of step S245, the storage address of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like. The CPU 103 refers to the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S242 is the jackpot determination value data. (Step S246).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S239 or step S246 (step S239; Yes, or step S246; Yes), the jackpot provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 The flag is set to an on state (step S247). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S248). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type read in step S235 or step S242, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S248. It is determined as one of a plurality of types of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, and “outward probability” (step S249). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S244, a random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type with respect to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determining table 131 is set. Is not assigned, the jackpot type will not be determined as “surprising”. Corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S249, the big hit type buffer value is set to any one of “00” to “04” (step S250).

  After executing one of the processes of step S241 and step S250, the maximum winning opening opening number is set (step S251). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, if the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the prize winning opening corresponds to the game that is opened 15 times. Set to “15”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” or the small hit type is “small hit”, the maximum value of the number of big winning opening is set to “2” corresponding to the two-time open game. To do.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data at step S240 (step S240; No), or when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data at step S246 ( Step S246; No) Or, after executing the process of step S251, a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the result of determining the variable display result or determining the jackpot type (step S252). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S240, or if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S246, it is variable. Corresponding to the determination result that the display result is “lost”, the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” that becomes the lost symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S240, the small hit symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S239 or step S246, “1”, “3”, which become the big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S249. ”Or“ 7 ”, one of the special symbols indicating the number is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S252, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S253), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S254), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. According to the setting, any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the table shown in FIG. In accordance with the selection setting, any one of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S264).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S263 (step S263; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 5, any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state (step S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Based on the reach determination random number MR2-2 extracted in step S267, the presence / absence of the reach state is determined by referring to any of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S265 (step S265). S268).

  If a determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state such as the determination result of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S268. As the use table, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set (step S270). On the other hand, when a determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1- in step S268. 1, as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result without reach state such as the determination result of non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 Then, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set (step S271).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. Either one is determined (step S273).

  Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol on the basis that the first starting condition is satisfied. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S268, it is changed by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the change pattern type. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is thus determined in step S273, the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C are used as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. And one of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B are selected and set (step S274). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S274 (step S276). .

  Here, in the processes of steps S275 and S276, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is determined by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, a special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S278 is executed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S279 is performed, each time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 41 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S279, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S280), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortage flag to turn it off, a process for clearing a special-figure variation number counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time-shortage state, etc. It only has to be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S297; No), a small hit start time production waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S298, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S302). . After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). For example, in the process of step S303, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the updated special figure fluctuation number count value is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the special game state end determination value is met. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag, etc., and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. After executing the end determination of the probability variation state or the short time state, the special symbol stop process ends. Note that the end determination based on the special figure variation count value may be performed only in the short-time state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. . Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like Then, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot ending presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 42, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, the timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S312 is “00” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S313). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “00” (step S313; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S314). As an example, in the process of step S314, the time reduction flag is set to the on state, and the count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. May be set in the special figure fluctuation counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “00” in step S313 (step S313; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed (step S315). As an example, in the process of step S315, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is the number of times of the special diagram variation. It only has to be set in the counter.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S314 and S315, the special figure process flag value is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S316), and then the big hit end process is terminated. To do.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). Determine whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value indicating a random number value for determining a normal display result from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure storage unit, the value of the ordinary process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result as the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol game in the general symbol game is set to “per normal symbol” or “ A decision is made as to whether or not it will be “usually lost”. At this time, for example, when one of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag is on, the determination is set so that the ratio of “decision per normal” is higher than when both are off. You may refer to the table. As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal” than in the normal state. The mouth is likely to be in an expanded open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the normal variation pattern may be determined such that the normal variation time is shorter than when both are off. This reduces the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game in the probability variation state and the short time state. The second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, a determination is made as to whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time determined in accordance with the normal time fluctuation pattern. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the normal symbol process flag value when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, for driving the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example. The value of the general process flag is updated to “4” after the setting for the enlargement / release control in which the movable blade piece is tilted, such as the setting of the normal operation pattern. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, a normal operation pattern may be set in which the period and number of times of performing the expansion opening control are increased as compared with the case where both are off. . As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the period and the number of times that the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state are increased based on the fact that the base map display result is “per base map”, and the game ball is in the second state. It becomes easier to enter the starting prize opening. If the normal map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stop process in step S143. You can make it. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is driven and the second start winning opening is set to the open expanded state is measured, and the elapsed time is enlarged corresponding to the ordinary electric actuating pattern. A determination is made whether the opening time has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the expansion opening period, the driving of the ordinary electric utility solenoid is stopped, and the movable wing piece is returned from the tilting position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening is in the expansion opening state. Set to change from normal to open state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 50 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 195. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  In the command analysis process of step S405, for example, a pending storage increase display process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51 is executed. In the reserved memory increase display process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is reception (step S151). At this time, if no pending storage number notification command is received (step S151; No), the pending storage increase display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the pending storage number notification command has been received (step S151; Yes), one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command is selected. It is determined whether the designated command has been received (step S152). Here, it is determined whether or not the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command has been received in the command analysis processing in step S405, and any of the start opening prize designation commands is received. When it is determined that there is a command, a command reception flag corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command may be set to an on state. As an example, when the first start opening prize designation command is received, the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is set to ON, while when the second start opening prize designation command is received, the second start opening prize designation command is set. Sets the specified command reception flag to the on state. In step S152, if either the first start opening prize designation command reception flag or the second start opening prize designation command reception flag is on, it may be determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), for example, depending on whether or not the first starting opening winning designation command receiving flag is on, etc. It is determined whether or not the received start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step S153). At this time, if it is determined that the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step S153; Yes), the reserved storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is updated corresponding to the increase in the first reserved storage number. Therefore, the first hold display increase update setting is performed (step S154). In this first hold display increase update setting, for example, the first start by the game ball having entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  When it is determined in step S153 that the command is the second start opening prize designation command (step S153; No), the reserved memory display in the start prize memory display area 5H corresponding to the increase in the second reserved memory number. 2nd hold display increase update setting for updating is performed (step S155). In the second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is displayed correspondingly when there is no start opening prize designation. Display update setting is performed when no start opening winning designation is specified for updating (step S156). In this display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, a display setting for changing all of the display parts that are displayed in blue or red in the start prize storage display area 5H to gray display, and a start prize storage display. Display setting for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the area 5H to gray display is performed. After performing such a display update setting when no start opening prize designation is made, the on-hold storage increase display process is terminated.

  As described above, when the first hold display increase update setting is performed in step S154 and the second hold display increase update setting is performed in step S155, the hold memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. If either of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command as the starting opening winning designation command is normally received, the start winning memory is stored as shown in FIG. 52 (A), for example. In the display area 5H, a first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A based on establishment of the first start condition and a second special figure reservation based on establishment of the second start condition The second reserved memory number, which is the number of stored pending data in the storage unit 151B, can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, in step S156, when the start opening prize designation is not specified, the display update setting is performed, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the first starting opening prize that becomes the start opening prize designation command is received. Based on the determination that neither the designation command nor the second start opening prize designation command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, By displaying in gray as shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be displayed so that they cannot be specified. After that, if the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, one of the processes of steps S154 and S155 is executed. A new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command can be added while maintaining the display mode in the gray display area. As an example, when the hold memory display as shown in FIG. 52 (B) is being performed, if the hold memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, By performing the first hold display increase update setting in S154, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), a blue display corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is added.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the image display device 5 is changed depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area, and “left” and “right” colored symbol display areas 5A. 5B includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of the color symbol in any one of 5B. At this time, if it is determined to start variable display, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to, in order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative design and color design, final decorative design that becomes the final stop design according to the variation pattern and variable display results, temporary stop design, specific production The process includes determining a pattern, a notice pattern, and the like, and setting a design variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and the like based on the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, various controls are performed from the symbol variation control pattern and the preview effect control pattern in accordance with the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value). Processing for reading out data and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying sound in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and playing the game effect lamp 9 and decorations by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. As an example, in the effect process during small hit control in step S165, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-2 and the hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. Reading from the various effect control pattern table 182 and setting the effect control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such a setting may be an effect operation common to both the accuracy and the small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “Accuracy”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off by output of electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as blinking / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (FIG. 54). Step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 6). It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined decorative symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a definitive decorative symbol.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the pattern is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Therefore, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 25A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 25B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. Then, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is It is determined whether it is one of the “surprise” or other than that (step S507). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, the change pattern designation command By reading the EXT data or the like, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 7, all the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is “non-reach”. Therefore, when it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4 (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S503 shown in FIG. 54, and step S504 is performed. The final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined by one of the processes of S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, it is designated by the variation pattern designation command in step S503 shown in FIG. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the special PG1-4 (see FIG. 7), it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”.

  When it is determined in step S508 in FIG. 55 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 (step S508; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG2-1 to special PG2-. It is determined whether it is any of the three fluctuation patterns or any other pattern (step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 7, each of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 designates that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. ing. Therefore, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506 shown in FIG. The final decorative symbol that constitutes the final stop symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 in FIG. 55 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-. One of the three variation patterns. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3, the combination of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result of the decorative pattern is selected from any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any one of the special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns, the combination of the finalized decorative symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 26C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S507; No), among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “ It is determined whether any one of “normal big hit” and “third probability variation” or any other one (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit” or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S511; Yes), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Is determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 26A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; No), the big hit type corresponds to either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 26B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After performing any one of the processes in steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 54, or after performing any one of the processes in steps S510, S512, and S513 in FIG. 55, the specific effect setting process is performed (steps). S514). FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, or those It is determined whether it is a specific effect other than (step S552). At this time, if it is any one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “intro”, the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step S553). . As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 27A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and shown in FIG. 27B in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set, and in the case of the “intro” specific effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 27C is set.

  Following the process of step S553, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S554). As an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. To do. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is selected from any one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S552. To decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-2, the specific effect patterns are stored in the pseudo sequences TP2-1 to TP2-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S552. Decide on one. In the case of a specific effect of “Intro”, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. At this time, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  After the determination in step S554, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S555). If the specific effect is “intro” (step S555; Yes), step S554 is performed. The previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C in accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 determined in (Step S556). For example, if the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “1”. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-2 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “2”. When the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-3 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “3”.

  By executing the processing of step S556 in this way, the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” is displayed. Each time it is determined, the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the determined intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 can be updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. And in the process of step S554, when it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-6, the last effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, or “intro” (step S552; No), it is determined in step S555 that the specific effect is other than “intro”. (Step S555; No), or after executing the process of step S556, the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, “expansion chance”, or other It is determined whether the specific effect is (step S557). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; No), the specific effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; Yes), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined. (Step S558), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S558, as an example, in the case of the specific effect of “slip”, the temporary stop symbol determination table is set according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 29E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is set, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change is set to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A is selected and set as a use table, while the variation pattern is super PA 3-4, super In the case of any one of PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super PF1-1, and special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 30C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated.

  As another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 32 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3, which become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8, are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above at step S514 shown in FIG. 54, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S571). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S571; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S571 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probable” (step S571; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S572). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S573). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S573, referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A set in step S572, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first certain change”. The presence / absence of the changing promotion effect is determined depending on which one is “third probability variation” (step S574). At this time, when it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S575; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S575; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S576, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 33 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process as described above in step S515 shown in FIG. 54, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S516). FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S516. In the notice effect setting process, first, the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is selected and set as a use table (step S591). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S592). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S592, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170, there is no notice or the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. (Step S593). At this time, if it is determined that there is no notice (step S594; Yes), the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S593 that any of the advance notice pattern types of advance notice CY1 to advance notice CY3 (step S594; No), the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 36, any one of the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 36 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 37 is selected and set as a use table (step S595). That is, when the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is decided in step S593, the notice pattern decision table 171A is set. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern decision table 171B is set. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY3 is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is set. Thereafter, the notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S596), and the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S596, for example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, for example, a random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is obtained from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number SR8-1, the notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S595 is referred to, so that there is no notice or the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4. Decide on either.

  As another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be the notice CY2, for example, a numerical value indicating the random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract data. Then, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S595 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-2, no notice or notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Decide on either.

  As yet another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, a random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is shown from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Extract numerical data. Then, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S595 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR8-3, no notice or notice patterns of notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. Decide on either.

  After executing the notice effect setting process as described above in step S516 shown in FIG. 54, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S517). At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result designated by the variable display result notification command, the specific effect pattern determined in step S554 shown in FIG. One of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 38 is used in accordance with the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Select and set as a pattern. Further, for example, corresponding to the notice pattern determined in step S596 shown in FIG. 58, any one of a plurality of kinds of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. Select and set as usage pattern.

  As an example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA3-1, the symbol variation control pattern of Super CPA3-1 is selected and set as a usage pattern. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA 3-5, either Super CPA 3-5-1 or Super CPA 3-5-2 is selected and set as a usage pattern. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the super PB3-1, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPB3-1 is selected and set as the use pattern. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the super PB 3-6, either the super CPB 3-6-1 or the super CPA 3-6-2 is selected and set as the use pattern.

  Here, when the variation pattern is super PA3-5, which one of the symbol variation control patterns of super CPA3-5-1 and super CPA3-5-2 is selected as the usage pattern, or the variation pattern is super PB3-6. The symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 3-6-1 and super CPA 3-6-2 to be selected as the use pattern is determined by, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a predetermined symbol variation control pattern. Based on this, it may be performed by referring to a predetermined symbol variation control pattern determination table. In this case, in the effect display in the operation effect, the symbols for the symbol variation control patterns of Super CPA 3-5-2 and Super CPA 3-6-2 in which the characters “Press the button!” Are gradation-displayed with seven colors of rainbow (rainbow display). The allocation of random values for determining symbol variation control patterns to the symbol variation control patterns of super CPA3-5-1 and super CPA3-6-1 displayed in red is larger than the allocation of random number values for determining variation control patterns. What should I do? As a result, when the variable display result is “losing”, in the effect image of the operation effect, the characters “Press the button!” Are displayed in red rather than the ratio of the gradation display (rainbow display) of the seven colors of the rainbow. The displayed percentage is higher.

  If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA4-1, and it is determined in Step S574 shown in FIG. 57 that there is a promotion effect during variation, the symbol variation of Super CPA4-1-1 A control pattern is selected and set as a usage pattern. If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA4-1 and it is determined in Step S574 shown in FIG. 57 that there is no promotion effect during variation, the symbol variation control pattern of Super CPA4-1-2. Is selected and set as the usage pattern. The variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA 4-5, the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is “normal”, and there is a promotion effect during variation in step S574 shown in FIG. If determined, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-1-1 is selected and set as the usage pattern. The variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA4-5, the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is “normal”, and there is no promotion effect during variation in step S574 shown in FIG. When determined, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-1-2 is selected and set as the usage pattern. The variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA4-5, and the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. If it is determined in step S574 that there is a promotion effect during variation, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-2-1 is selected and set as a usage pattern. The variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PA4-5, and the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. When it is determined in step S574 that there is no promotion effect during variation, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA 4-5-2-2 is selected and set as the usage pattern.

  Further, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the super PB4-1, and it is determined in step S574 shown in FIG. 57 that there is a promotion effect during variation, the symbol variation of the super CPB4-1-1 A control pattern is selected and set as a usage pattern. If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the super PB 4-1 and it is determined in step S 574 shown in FIG. 57 that there is no promotion effect during variation, the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPB 4-1-2. Is selected and set as the usage pattern. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PB5-1 and the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is “normal”, the symbol variation control pattern of Super CPB5-1-1 Is selected and set as the usage pattern. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PB5-1 and the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, The design variation control pattern of the super CPB 5-1-2 is selected and set as the usage pattern.

  Thus, when the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is “normal”, the super CPA 4-5 that displays the text “Press the button!” In red in the effect display in the operation effect. 1-1, when the design variation control pattern of super CPA 4-5-1-2 and super CPB 5-1-1 is selected as a usage pattern and is one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” , The symbol variation control pattern of Super CPA4-5-2-1, Super CPA4-5-2-2, and Super CPB5-1-2, which displays the characters "Press the button!" With gradation of 7 colors of rainbow (rainbow display) Is selected as the usage pattern. For this reason, in the effect display in the operation effect, when the characters “Press the button!” Are displayed in gradations (rainbow display) with seven colors of rainbow, When the gaming state is finished, the state is controlled to the probability changing state, and when displayed in red, if the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the normal state after the big hit gaming state is finished.

  In the effect display in the operation effect, even if the jackpot type specified by the variable display result notification command is “normal”, the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in gradation with seven colors of rainbow (rainbow display). The symbol variation control pattern of super CPA4-5-2-1, super CPA4-5-2-2, and super CPB5-1-2 is selected as the usage pattern, and one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” is selected. Even in the case, the symbol variation control pattern of Super CPA 4-5-1-1, Super CPA 4-5-1-2, and Super CPB 5-1-1 that displays the text “Press the button!” In red is used. It may be selected as a pattern. In this case, the selection of the symbol variation control pattern is performed by referring to a predetermined symbol variation control pattern determination table based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining a predetermined symbol variation control pattern, for example. That's fine. This symbol variation control pattern determination table is a super CPA 4-5-1-1-displaying the text “Press the button!” In red when the jackpot type specified by the variable display result notification command is “normal”. 1, the allocation of random values for determining the symbol variation control pattern to the symbol variation control pattern of Super CPA 4-5-1-2 and Super CPB 5-1-1 is a gradation of the characters "Press the button!" What is necessary is just to set so that it may become higher than the ratio with respect to the symbol fluctuation | variation control pattern of super CPA4-5-2-1 to display (rainbow display), super CPA4-5-2-2, and super CPB5-1-2. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the super CPA 4-5-1-1 that displays the text “Press the button!” In red, Rather than assigning a random number value for determining the symbol variation control pattern to the symbol variation control pattern of Super CPA 4-5-1-2 and Super CPB 5-1-1, the characters "Press the button!" What is necessary is just to set so that the ratio with respect to the symbol variation control pattern of the super CPA4-5-2-1, the super CPA4-5-2-2, and the super CPB5-1-2 to be displayed (rainbow display) may be high. With this setting, when the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in gradations (rainbow display) with seven colors of rainbow in the effect display in the operation effect, the variable display result of the decorative pattern becomes “big hit”. For example, after the big hit game state is finished, the rate of control to the probability change state is high, and when displayed in red, if the variable symbol display result of the decorative pattern is “big hit”, it is normal after the big hit game state ends The rate controlled by the state can be increased.

Also, when the variation pattern is super PA4-5 and it is determined in step S574 shown in FIG. 57 that there is a promotion effect during variation, either super CPA4-5-1-1 or super CPA4-5-2-1 The pattern change control pattern is selected as a use pattern, or the change pattern is super PA4-5, and it is determined in step S574 shown in FIG. 57 that there is no change promotion effect during change. 2. Which of the symbol variation control patterns of Super CPA 4-5-2-2 is selected as the usage pattern, and when the variation pattern is Super PB5-1, Super CPB5-1-1 and Super CPB5-1-2 Which symbol variation control pattern is selected as the usage pattern depends on, for example, a predetermined symbol variation control pattern. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number for over emissions determined, but it may also be to be made by referring to the predetermined symbol variation control pattern determination table. In this case, Super CPA4-5-2-1, Super CPA4-5-2-2, Super CPB5, which displays gradation of the characters “Press the button!” In seven colors of rainbow (rainbow display) in the effect display in the operation effect. The random number value for determining the symbol variation control pattern with respect to the symbol variation control pattern of -1-2 is displayed in red, super CPA 4-5-1-1, super CPA 4-5-1-2, super CPB5-1. What is necessary is just to make it more than allocation of the random number value for the determination of the symbol variation control pattern with respect to one symbol variation control pattern. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio of the characters “Press the button!” Gradation displayed in 7 colors of rainbow (rainbow display) is displayed in red on the effect image. Will be higher than the rate that will be. On the other hand, as described above, when the variable display result is “losing”, the characters “Press the button!” Are displayed in gradation in seven colors of rainbow (rainbow display) in the effect image of the operation effect. The ratio displayed in red is higher than the ratio displayed. For this reason, in the effect display in the operation effect, the reliability (variable display) is better when the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in gradation with seven colors of rainbow (rainbow display) than when displayed in red. The result is likely to be a “big hit”). Therefore, the rainbow display is more advantageous for the player than the red display.

  Following the processing in step S517, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S517. Is set (step S518). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left” and “middle” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are provided. , The decorative symbols start to change in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the color symbols change in either the “left” or “right” colored symbol display areas 5A, 5B. Is set to start the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 (step S519). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S520), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  In the decorative symbol variation setting process, for example, a process of determining a definite color symbol may be performed before the process of step S519 is performed. At this time, depending on which of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is transmitted from the main board 11, the determined color symbols in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed. decide. For example, in the case of determining the determined color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5A according to the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “ In the case of determining the color design of “blue” and determining the determined color design in the “right” color design display area 5B, the color design of “red” or “blue” may be determined.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the button valid period flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S351). Here, the button valid period flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S362 described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S361.

  When the button valid period flag is ON in step S351 (step S351; Yes), it is determined whether or not the player has operated the operation button 30 (step S352). Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 is turned on in accordance with the operation of the operation button 30 by the player. When it is determined in step S352 that the player has operated the operation button 30 (step S352; Yes), there is a button operation corresponding to the symbol variation control pattern set in step S517 shown in FIG. Switching to the symbol variation control pattern, or switching to the notice pattern after button operation corresponding to the notice pattern determined in step S596 shown in FIG. 58 (step S353).

  As an example, one of super CPB 3-6-1, super CPB 3-6-2, super CPB 5-1-1, and super CPB 5-1-2 is set as a design variation control pattern in the decorative design variation setting process in step S161. In the case where the operation detection signal is turned on when the button valid period flag is set corresponding to being within a predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed, for example, super CPB 3-6 -1, super CPB 3-6-2 is switched to super CPB 3-6-3, and super CPB 5-1-1 and super CPB 5-1-2 are super CPB 5-3-1 depending on the presence or absence of the promotion effect during the change , Effect operation in reach effect β2 and reach effect γ2 by switching to any of super CPB5-1-3-2 Develop.

  Further, when any of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, notice CYP3-3-1 is set as the notice effect control pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161, the notice effect is displayed. If the button valid period flag is set corresponding to being within the executable period, and the operation detection signal is turned on, for example, the notice CYP3-1-1 is given as the notice CYP3-1-1. By switching to 2, the notice CYP3-2-1 is changed to the notice CYP3-2-2, the notice CYP3-3-1 is changed to the notice CYP3-3-2, etc., thereby changing the effect operation in the notice effect.

  If it is determined in step S351 that the button valid period flag is on (step S351; No), or if it is determined in step S352 that the player has not operated the operation button 30 (step S351). S352; No), the production control process timer value is updated by subtracting, for example, 1 (step S354). At this time, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values by comparing the updated effect control process timer value with various timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern (step S355). ). And if it does not correspond with any timer judgment value (step S355; No), the process during decoration design change is complete | finished.

  If the timer determination value is matched in step S355 (step S355; Yes), various control data (effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. Data (either data or an end code) is read (step S356). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S355 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. What is necessary is just to read control data by the process of step S356.

  Then, based on the control data read in step S355, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the button effective period, which is a period during which the effect image can be switched in response to the operation of the operation button 30 by the player. (Step S357). Specifically, if the control data read in step S355 is control data when the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 is ended, the button valid period ends. Judge that it is. If it is determined in step S357 that the button valid period has ended (step S357; Yes), the symbol variation without button operation corresponding to the symbol variation control pattern set in step S517 shown in FIG. Switching to the control pattern (step S358).

  Specifically, any one of super CPB 3-6-1, super CPB 3-6-2, super CPB 5-1-1, and super CPB 5-1-2 is used as the design variation control pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161. If the operation detection signal does not turn on when the button valid period flag is set in correspondence with being within a predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed, for example, super CPB3-6-1 and super CPB3-6-2 are switched to super CPB3-6-4, and super CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-2 are super CPB5-1-1- 4-1 and Super CPB5-1-4-2, for example, by switching to reach production α2, β2, γ2 And run in a disadvantageous manner than when the operation detection signal is turned on.

  After executing any one of the processes in steps S353 and S358, for example, an effect control timer setting unit corresponding to the effect control process timer set value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern switched in any of steps S353 and S358. The initial value of the effect control process timer provided in 192 is set (step S359). Thereafter, the flag during the button valid period is cleared and turned off (step S360).

  If it is determined in step S357 that it is not the end timing of the button effective period in step S357 (step S357; No), has the end timing of the button effective period been reached based on the control data read in step S355? It is determined whether or not (step S361). Specifically, if the control data read in step S355 is control data when an operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 is started, the button valid period start timing has come. Judge that it is. If it is determined in step S361 that the button valid period start timing has been reached (step S361; Yes), the button valid period flag is set to the on state (step S362).

  If it is determined in step S357 that it is not the start timing of the button valid period in step S361 (step S361; No), it is determined whether or not it is an end code (step S363). After executing any of the processes in steps S360 and S362, or when it is determined in step S363 that the code is not an end code (step S363; No), the control data read in step S356 is used. Then, the effect control command process for performing the command or setting is executed (step S364), and then the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  As an example, when either the super CPB 3-6-1 or the super CPB 5-1-1 is set as the symbol variation control pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161, an operation button is displayed to the player in step S356. When the control data at the start of the operation effect instructing the operation of 30 is read, an effect image in which the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in red is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. . In addition, when either the super CPB 3-6-2 or the super CPB 5-1-2 is set as the symbol variation pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161, the operation button 30 is displayed to the player in step S356. When the control data at the start of the operation effect for instructing the operation is read, an effect image in which the characters “Press the button!” Are displayed in gradation with seven colors of rainbow (rainbow display) is displayed on the image display device 5. Displayed in the area.

  If any of the notice effect control patterns of notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, notice CYP3-3-1 is set as the notice effect control pattern in step S596 shown in FIG. Any effect image (for example, an image prompting the operation of the operation button 30) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the effect image may not be displayed. Here, when the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, notice CYP3-3-1 displays an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, each notice effect control. A common effect image may be displayed in the pattern, or different effect images may be displayed.

  If it is determined in step S363 that the code is an end code (step S363; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S364). Then, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the processing at the end of decorative symbol variation (step S365), and then the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit control effect processing executed in step S164 of FIG. In the effect processing during the big hit control, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S601). At this time, if a hit end designation command is received (step S601; Yes), a setting for ending the big hit effect that is performed corresponding to the big hit gaming state is made (step S602), and the value of the production process flag is set. After updating to “6” corresponding to the ending effect process (step S603), the big hit control effect process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S602, a predetermined display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, a predetermined sound effect signal is transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a predetermined electrical decoration signal is transmitted. It is only necessary to perform control to end the effect operation that is the effect during the big hit by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 or the like.

  If no hit end designation command is received in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not a promotion effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S604). . Here, the promotion effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process of step S612 described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing a process of step S616. In addition, when the process of step S602 is executed, the promotion effect in-progress flag may be cleared and turned off.

  If the flag during promotion effect is OFF in step S604 (step S604; No), for example, depending on whether or not the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined effect start determination value, etc. It is determined whether or not the execution timing has come (step S605). Here, in the big hit state of 2 rounds, since the execution period of each round is short, the effect control process timer value may be set so as not to reach the effect start determination value.

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; Yes), the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 28B is selected as the use table. Set (step S606). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the promotion effect execution random number SR5 is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S607). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S607, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” by referring to the jackpot middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B. Depending on whether it is, it is decided whether or not there is a jackpot promotion promotion, and if there is a jackpot promotion promotion decision whether to make a jackpot promotion promotion success or a jackpot promotion promotion failure, etc. A determination regarding the execution of the effect is made (step S608).

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; No), or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in step S608 (step S609; Yes). ), A setting is made to execute an effect operation that is an effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds that is the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state (step S610). As an example, in the processing of step S610, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 rounds big hit or sudden / small hit transmitted from the main board 11. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 39B, and the effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, By transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14, an effect operation that is an effect during a big hit is executed. After executing the processing of step S610, the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  In the processing of step S610, when setting corresponding to the fact that the designation command for opening the big prize opening for accuracy / small hit is transmitted from the main board 11, it is executed immediately before the big hit gaming state is entered. Depending on the variation pattern type into which the variation pattern in the variable display of decorative symbols is classified, settings for executing different rendering operations may be performed. As an example, a variation pattern type common to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed with the variation pattern classified into the following and then controlled to the big round hit state for two rounds, the winning start CST2-2 shown in FIG. The control pattern is selected and read as an effect control pattern to be used sequentially, and an effect operation is set according to the effect control pattern. On the other hand, the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. When the game is controlled to the 2 round big hit gaming state after the variable display is performed, the effect of sequentially using the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and hit control CRE1-1 shown in FIG. A control pattern is selected and read out, and an effect operation is set according to the effect control pattern.

  If it is determined in step S608 to execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S609; No), settings for starting the jackpot promotion effect are performed (step S611). As an example, in the process of step S611, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 round big hits transmitted from the main board 11. Then, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. At this time, for example, the value of the notification content buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 (notification content buffer value) is set in accordance with which of the big success promotion effect and the big success promotion effect is executed. It may be. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, while the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect. Set to. Then, after setting the promotion effect in-progress flag to the on state (step S612), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S604 that the promoted effect flag is on (step S604; Yes), for example, does the effect control process timer value match the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern? Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the end timing of promotion effect during jackpot is reached (step S613). At this time, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; No), settings are made to control the rendering operation that becomes the jackpot promotion effect (step S614). As an example, in the process of step S614, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the production operation that becomes the promotion effect during the big hit, for example, by transmitting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S614, the big hit control effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S613 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; Yes), settings are made to end the jackpot promotion effect (step S615), and the flag for the promotion effect is cleared. Then, after the off state is set (step S616), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect process executed in step S166 of FIG. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S631). Here, the ending effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S638 described later, and is cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S641.

  When the ending effect flag is OFF in step S631 (step S631; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the big hit type is “normal”. It is determined whether or not it is a certain big hit (step S632). At this time, if it is not the normal big hit (step S632; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S633). If the jackpot type is “third probability variation” (step S633; Yes), the promotion success effect has been executed from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. It is determined whether or not (step S634). As an example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. What is necessary is just to determine that it is not.

  When it is determined in step S633 that the jackpot type is other than “third probability variation” (step S633; No), or when it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has been executed (step S634). ; Yes), a setting for starting a production operation to be a predetermined non-promotion ending production is performed (step S635). As an example, in the process of step S635, it is determined whether the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state ends by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Then, according to the determination result of the jackpot gaming state to be ended, the effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 39B, and the effect control process timer is set.

  If it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has not been executed (step S634; No), a setting is made to start the effect operation that becomes the ending promotion success effect (step S636). As an example, in the process of step S636, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion success effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  If it is determined in step S632 that it is a normal big hit (step S632; Yes), a setting is made to start an effect operation that becomes an ending promotion failure effect (step S637). As an example, in the process of step S637, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion failure effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  After executing any of the processes in steps S635 to S637, the ending effect flag is set to the on state (step S638), and the ending effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S631 that the ending effect flag is on (step S631; Yes), for example, the effect control process timer value matches the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect depending on whether or not (step S639). Here, the ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, including an unpromoted ending effect, an ending promotion success effect, and an ending promotion failure effect.

  If it is determined in step S639 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; No), settings are made to control the effect operation that will be the ending effect (step S640). As an example, in the process of step S640, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123 according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the rendering operation as an ending effect by transmitting the illumination signal or transmitting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S640, the ending effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S639 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; Yes), for example, the ending effect flag is cleared and turned off, and the display control unit 123 Ending effects such as supplying a predetermined display control command, transmitting a predetermined sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and transmitting a predetermined electrical signal to the lamp control board 14. Is set to end the process (step S641). At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S642), and then the ending effect process ends.

  Next, a specific example of the rendering operation by displaying various rendering images centering on the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 will be described. The effect control board 12 responds to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example, The control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in step S519 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol is started.

  Hereinafter, a specific example in the case where the variable display result of the decorative design is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” will be described. FIG. 62 shows that when the specific display is “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed, or when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the “slip” specific effect is executed. In this case, a display operation example in the case where a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect as shown in FIGS. 62 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. 62 is designated when a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 62E1 to 62E is executed, and when a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-5 is designated, FIG. 62D1 to FIG. When a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” as shown in (D6) is executed, and a variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7 is designated, “expansion chance” as shown in FIGS. 62 (F1) to (F6). This is a case where a specific effect of “eye end” is executed. In FIG. 62 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, the final left symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22A is referred to in step S505 shown in FIG. Corresponding to the determination of the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” as the stopped symbol FZ1-1, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 62B is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), if the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, the specific design is performed. Since the effect pattern is always determined to be only the slip TP1-1 and the specific effect of "slip" is executed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol is re-fluctuated at high speed. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L are not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. Further, when the specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed, the development chance eye HC6 is obtained by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22D in step S504 shown in FIG. In response to the determination that the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 is determined, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Will be done. When the “pseudo-ream” specific effect is executed, the decorative design indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. By referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A in step S558 shown in FIG. 56 based on the symbol FZ1-1, the combination of decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance eye GC6 is left center right temporary. In response to the determination as the stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 62 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 62 (C1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. ) And then stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. The confirmed decorative symbol is stopped (final stop). At this time, the final decorative symbol shown in FIG. 22B is displayed in step S505 shown in FIG. 54 as the final decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R and the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. By referring to the determination table 160B, or by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 23, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop It is determined as symbol FZ1-3.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect of “pseudo train” is executed, as an example, the number “7” is shown in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R as shown in FIG. 62 (D1). After the decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), as shown in FIG. 62 (D2), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. ), The decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, after temporary stop display such as decorative fluctuation display is performed, the decorative symbols may be changed again in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as shown in FIG. 62 (D3). . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (D4) to (D6), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 62 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R ( After the temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 62 (E2), the decorative symbols are re-varied at high speed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol indicating the numeral “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Here, as shown in FIG. 62 (E1), the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is, for example, the right final stop symbol FZ1-determined in step S505 shown in FIG. 2 is determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. 29A in step S596 shown in FIG. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (E4), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C, the non-reach combination is confirmed. The decorative design is stopped (final stop display).

  When a specific effect of “end of development opportunity” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (F1), a decorative symbol indicating a number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. After the stop display (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 62 (F2), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral “7” is also stopped (temporary stop display) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C. As a result, the decorative symbols constituting the development opportunity eye HC6 are temporarily displayed. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (F3), an effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative design rotates in a certain direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 62 (F4), the decorative design is displayed. An effect display is performed so that the player can expect that the variable display state becomes a reach state. Here, if the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped from the effect display as shown in FIG. 62 (F4) is rotated in the reverse direction, the development of the reach state occurs. In this example, the development that reaches the reach state does not occur, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (F5), after the effect display is performed such that the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is returned to the original state as shown in FIG. 62 (F5). The confirmed decorative symbols constituting the development chance eye HC6 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 63 shows a display operation example in the case where the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the “Intro” specific effect as shown in FIG. 63 is executed. In FIG. 63 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 63B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the area 5R, and the character image CH1 is displayed at a display position corresponding to the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. Note that the character image CH1 only needs to appear as an effect image in a reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state later.

  Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), after the effect display is performed to update the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is “right”. In the decorative symbol display area 5R, the updated display of the decorative symbol indicating the number “3” is performed. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), after the effect display that further updates the decorative symbols updated and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is performed, For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), in accordance with the change of the character image CH1, in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the updated display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is changed to the “right” decorative symbol. In the symbol display area 5R, an update display to the decorative symbol indicating the number “1” is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are updated in accordance with the change of the character image CH1. For example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (H) to 63 (K), in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, decorative symbols indicating numbers “1” to “3” are updated and displayed in a predetermined order. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (L), an effect display that updates the decorative symbol is performed, and then “3” as shown in FIG. 63 (M). A decorative symbol indicating the number is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 64 shows an example of a display operation when the specific effect of “intro” is executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. For example, the variation pattern designation command is used to change the variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. When any one is designated, a specific effect of “intro” as shown in FIG. 64 is executed. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 64, the same effect display as in FIGS. 63A to 63L is performed in the portions of FIGS. 64A to 64L. Thereafter, in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (M), the decorative symbol indicating the number “2” is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. The variable display state becomes the reach state together with the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed at. When the specific effect of “intro” is completed in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (N), after the character image CH1 is erased, a reach effect corresponding to the change of the variable display state to the reach state is started. After that, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a reach combination, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination, and the like are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 65 to FIG. 69 show examples of the display operation when the specific effect is not executed and the variable display result is “big hit” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. The example of the display operation in the case where the specific effect is not executed among the cases where the jackpot type is other than “surprise” is shown. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. As shown in FIG. 65 (B), the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Start fluctuation. Then, for example, when it is Super PA3-1, Super PA3-5, Super PB3-1, Super PB3-6, Super PA4-1, Super PA4-5, Super PB4-1, Super PB5-1, etc. When the specific effect is not executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the decorative symbols indicating the number “4” are stopped in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. By displaying (temporary stop display), the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 65 (C), after passing through the “normal” reach effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the friend character and the enemy character face each other. An image is displayed.

  Here, for example, when the reach effect α1 is executed as in the case of Super PA3-1 and Super PA4-1, the effect operation in the reach effect is not developed, as shown in FIG. Reach effect display progresses. In addition, when the reach effect β1 is executed as in the case of the super PB3-1, or when the reach effect γ1 is executed as in the case of the super PB4-1, FIG. 65 (F). Without displaying the effect image in the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 as shown in FIG. 65, by displaying the effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character fight as shown in FIG. , To develop the production operation in reach production.

  On the other hand, for example, when the reach effect α2 is executed as in super PA3-5 or super PA4-5, or when the reach effect β2 is executed as in super PB3-6, When the reach effect γ2 is executed as in PB5-1, an effect image in the operation effect as shown in FIG. 65 (F) is displayed. At this time, the character “Press the button!” In the effect image shown in FIG. 65F is displayed in red when the big hit type is “normal”, whereas the big hit type is “first probability change”. In the case of “third probability variation”, gradation display (rainbow display) is performed with seven colors of rainbow. When the reach effect α2 is executed, the button is enabled when the reach effect β2 and the reach effect γ2 are executed regardless of whether or not the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period. When the operation button 30 is not operated within the period, the operation of the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period by not proceeding to the effect operation in the reach effect by proceeding to the effect display shown in FIG. It performs in a more disadvantageous manner than when it was made. Note that, as described above, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), when the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 in which only the effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other are displayed, the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed. ), When the reach effect β1, reach effect β2, reach effect γ1, and reach effect γ2 in which an effect image in which a friend character and an enemy character image fight can be displayed, the reliability (variable display result) Is likely to be a “big hit”). For this reason, the effect image shown in FIG. 65 (G) is displayed without developing the effect operation in the reach effect than when the effect image in the reach effect is developed and the effect image shown in FIG. 65 (G) is displayed. Even when the reach effect β1, the reach effect β2, the reach effect γ1, and the reach effect γ2 are executed, the appearance is disadvantageous.

  On the other hand, when the reach effect β2 and the reach effect γ2 are being executed, the player operates the operation button 30 within the button operation effective period, and is transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 accordingly. When the operation detection signal is turned on, for example, the effect control CPU 120 switches the design variation control pattern of the super CPB 3-6-1 and super CPB 3-6-2 to the super CPB 3-6-4, and super CPA4- 5-1, Super CPB 5-1-1, Super CPB 5-1-2 of the design change control pattern of Super CPB 5-1-1, Super CPB 5-1-2 depending on the presence or absence of promotion effect during the change An effect image in which an ally character and an enemy character image fight as shown in FIG. By making it show, the stage operation in reach production is developed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65E, when the reach effect display progresses without the effect operation in the reach effect being developed, the reach display α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed, and the variable display result is “lost”. When the reach effect β2 is executed and the operation button 30 is not operated within the button effective period, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a decorative pattern constituting a reach-losing combination is formed. Is stopped (final stop). On the other hand, when the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed, when the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped. Displayed (temporary stop display). In addition, when the reach effect γ2 is executed, if the operation button 30 is not operated within the button effective period, the variation pattern is the same as when the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period. 65E, the effect image shown in FIG. 65E is displayed as it is without being changed, and thereafter, FIGS. 67A, 67D, 68E, 68A to 68D, and FIG. ) To (D), when the same time as the display time of the effect images has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped (temporarily stopped). When the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed, when the variable display result is “big hit” or when the reach effect γ2 is executed, the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period. If not, instead of the effect image shown in FIG. 65 (E), for example, an effect image as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C) may be displayed in which the teammate character loses the battle with the enemy character. When such an effect image is displayed, for example, after the effect image in the revival effect for revitalizing the ally character is displayed by the doctor character hitting the ally character, the effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (B). What is necessary is just to make it stop-display (temporary stop display) the decoration symbol which comprises a big jackpot combination.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), when the effect operation in the reach effect develops and the reach effect display proceeds, when the reach effect β2 is executed, the operation button 30 is within the button effective period. When the operation is performed, an effect image as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B) is displayed, and then an effect image in which the teammate character loses the battle with the enemy character as shown in FIG. 67 (C). Is displayed, and the decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped (temporarily stopped). On the other hand, when the reach effect γ2 is executed and the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period, FIGS. 67 (A), (D), (E), and FIGS. 68 (A) to (C). After the effect image as shown in FIG. 68 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), an effect image in which the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped. Displayed (temporary stop display). Regardless of whether or not the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period, an effect image for fighting a teammate character and an enemy character is displayed as shown in FIG. You may make it provide separately the reach production which develops.

  When the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) as shown in FIGS. 66 (B) and 68 (D), for example, in step S574 shown in FIG. When it is decided not to execute the effect, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol as it is as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol which is a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 69 (B), FIG. 69 (C). As shown in Fig. 5, the same pattern is changed again in the state where the same decorative symbols are aligned in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination. If the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after performing the change again of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (C), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop-display a decorative design.

  FIG. 70 shows a display operation example in the case where the notice effect of “mail display” is executed. In this display operation example, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), for example, in response to the start of fluctuation of special symbols in a special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. As shown in FIG. 70 (B), the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Start fluctuation. Thereafter, for example, the information is read from the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 decided in step S517 shown in FIG. 54 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 decided in step S596 shown in FIG. In accordance with the effect display control data and the like, for example, as shown in FIG. 70C, an effect image YH1 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. Then, when the player operates the operation button 30 within a predetermined period, and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 to the effect control board 12 is turned on accordingly, for example, the effect control CPU 120 By switching the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2, the effect image YH2 indicating the mail message as shown in FIG. Change the direction. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period, the effect image YH1 is deleted as shown in FIG. 70 (E), for example, without switching the notice effect control pattern, The notice effect ends. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), the decorative symbol variable display proceeds, such as temporarily displaying the decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  FIG. 71 shows an example of a display operation when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 71 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 (B) to (D), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as a big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an effect image for notifying the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. Then, as an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 71 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 71, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, for example, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes of steps S239 and S246 shown in FIG. 44, and the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the jackpot determination value data. By determining whether or not to perform, the variable display result is determined as “big hit”, and whether or not to control the big hit gaming state is determined before the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. Further, in the process of step S249, based on the determination that the control is set to the big hit gaming state, the big hit types are “normal”, “first positive change”, “second positive change”, “third positive change”, “second positive change”, It is determined to be one of a plurality of types of “4 probability variation” and “surprising accuracy”. In the process of step S268 shown in FIG. 46, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed based on the determination that the jackpot flag is OFF in step S261 in response to the determination result that the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state. Decide whether to reach reach. Then, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol is set to one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, the determination result of whether to reach the reach state, or the like. decide. Subsequently, in the process of step S276, based on the determination result in step S273, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. After that, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11, and the decoration of step S161 shown in FIG. By executing the symbol variation setting process and the decorative symbol variation processing in step S162, control for executing various effect operations during variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the determination result in step S276.

  Here, when the variation pattern of any one of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4 and Super PA4-1 to Super PA4-4 is determined in the process of Step S276, the production control is performed on the production control board 12 side. The CPU 120 for super CPA3-1, super CPA4-1-1, and super CPA4-1-2 determined in step S517 according to the determination result in the changing promotion effect setting process in step S515 shown in FIG. In accordance with the symbol variation control pattern such as the above, by performing the decorative symbol variation in-process in step S162 shown in FIG. 53, the effect operation in the reach effect α1 is performed. In the effect operation in the reach effect α1, the effect image in the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 is not displayed, and the reach effect is executed in the first mode in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other. The

  Further, when the variation pattern of any one of Super PA 3-5 to Super PA 3-8 and Super PA 4-5 to Super PA 4-8 is determined in the process of Step S276, the effect control board 12 side is for effect control. Depending on the jackpot type specified in the variable display result command, the determination result in the changing promotion effect setting process in step S515 shown in FIG. 54, etc., the CPU 120 determines the super CPA 3-5-1 determined in step S517, According to the design variation control pattern such as Super CPA3-5-1, Super CPA4-5-1-1, Super CPA4-5-1-2, Super CPA4-5-2-1, Super CPA4-5-2-2, By performing the decorative symbol variation process in step S162 shown in FIG. 53, the effect operation in the reach effect α2 It takes place. In the effect operation in the reach effect α2, regardless of whether or not the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period after the effect image in the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. The reach production is executed without developing the first mode in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other.

  Further, when the variation pattern of any one of Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-5 and Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-4 is determined in the process of Step S276, the effect control board 12 side is for effect control. The super-CPB3-1 or super-CPB4 determined by the CPU 120 in step S517 in accordance with the jackpot type specified in the variable display result command or the determination result in the changing promotion effect setting process in step S515 shown in FIG. In accordance with the symbol variation control pattern such as 1-1, super CPB 4-1-2, etc., performing the decorative symbol variation process in step S 162 shown in FIG. 53 performs the rendering operation in reach effect β 1 and reach effect γ 1. . In the effect operations in the reach effect β1 and the reach effect γ1, the effect character in the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 is not displayed, and the teammate character and the enemy character face each other in the form of the reach effect. From the first mode, this is developed and executed in a second mode in which a friendly character and an enemy character who are more advantageous to the player than this mode fight.

  If the variation pattern of any one of the super PB 3-6 to the super PB 3-9 and the super PB 5-1 to the super PB 5-1 is determined in the process of step S276, the effect control board 12 side is for effect control. The super CPB 3-6-1 determined in step S517 according to the jackpot type specified in the variable display result command, the determination result in the changing promotion effect setting process in step S515 shown in FIG. According to the design variation control pattern of super CPB3-6-2, super CPB5-1-1, super CPB5-1-2, etc., by executing the decorative symbol variation processing of step S162 shown in FIG. 53, reach production β2, An effect operation in the reach effect γ2 is performed. In the effect operation in the reach effect β2 and the reach effect γ2, the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period after the effect image in the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed. Based on, for example, super CPB 3-6-1 and super CPB 3-6-2 are switched to super CPB 3-6-3, and super CPB 5-1-1 and super CPB 5-1-2 are changed according to the presence or absence of changing promotion effects. By switching to either Super CPB5-1-3-1 or Super CPB5-1-3-2, the aspect of reach production is changed from the first aspect in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other than this aspect. It is developed and executed in a second mode in which a friendly character and an enemy character that are advantageous to the user fight.

  On the other hand, when the button operation effective period elapses without the operation button 30 being operated, the super CPB 3-6-1 and the super CPB 3-6-2 are switched to the super CPB 3-6-4, for example. Reach production by switching CPB5-1-1 or Super CPB5-1-2 to either Super CPB5-1-4-1 or Super CPB5-1-4-2 depending on the presence or absence of the promotion promotion during fluctuation Is executed without developing the first mode in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other. In other words, the reach effect is executed in the first mode in which the friendly character and the enemy character face each other, which is more disadvantageous than the second mode in which the teammate character and the enemy character fight.

  In this way, in the reach effect, a reach effect (for example, reach) corresponding to the player who operates the operation button 30 is provided by providing a case where the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30 is executed or not. While it is possible to execute the production α2, the reach production β2, and the reach production γ2), the reach production (for example, the reach production α1, the reach production β1, and the reach production γ1) corresponding to the player who does not operate the operation button 30 can be executed. Therefore, the variation of reach production can be diversified, and the reach production matching the player's preference can be executed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The super CPB3 determined in step S517 based on the fact that the variation pattern of any one of super PB3-6 to super PB3-9 and super PB5-1 to super PB5-1 is determined in the process of step S276. -6-1, Super CPB 3-6-2, Super CPB 5-1-1, Super CPB 5-1-2, etc. According to the symbol variation control pattern, the decorative symbol variation processing of step S162 shown in FIG. 53 is executed. When the operation button 30 is operated within the button effective period, the reach effect is changed from the first mode in which the teammate character and the enemy character face each other, from the teammate character and the enemy character that are more advantageous to the player than this mode. Develop into a second mode of fighting. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within the button valid period, the reach effect is the first in which the friendly character and the enemy character face each other, which is more disadvantageous than the second mode in which the friendly character and the enemy character fight. Perform in a manner. Thereby, since the player can feel as if it was in an unfavorable mode by not operating the operation button 30, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, when it is determined in step S249 shown in FIG. 44 that the big hit type is “normal”, the effect control CPU 120, for example, in step S517, for example, the variation control designation command If the variation pattern specified by is super PA3-5, it is super CPA3-5-1, if it is super PB3-6, it is super CPB3-6-1, and if it is super PA4-5, step S515 shown in FIG. Depending on the decision result in the changing promotion promotion setting process, either super CPA4-5-1-1 or super CPA4-5-1-2 is selected, and if super PB5-1, super CPB5-1-1 is decided. To do. Then, the production control CPU 120 determines the super CPA 3-5-1, super CPB 3-6-1, super CPA 4-5-1-1, super CPA 4-5-1-2, super CPB 5-1 determined in step S517. In accordance with the symbol variation control pattern such as −1, the decorative symbol variation processing in step S162 shown in FIG. 53 is executed, and the effect image in the operation effect is displayed with the text “Press the button!” In red.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S249 shown in FIG. 44 that the jackpot type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the rendering control board 12 side performs the rendering control. If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is super PA3-5 in step S517, for example, the CPU 120 is super CPA3-5-2, and if it is super PB3-6, it is super CPB3-6-2. If it is a super PA4-5, either the super CPA4-5-2-1 or the super CPA4-5-2-2 is selected as the super PB5 according to the determination result in the changing promotion effect setting process in step S515 shown in FIG. If it is -1, it is determined to be super CPB 5-1-2. Then, the production control CPU 120 determines the super CPA 3-5-2, super CPB 3-6-2, super CPA 4-5-2-1, super CPA 4-5-2-2, super CPB 5-1 determined in step S517. 53 is executed in accordance with the symbol variation control pattern such as -2, and in the effect image during the operation effect in step S162 shown in FIG. 53, the characters "Press the button!" (Rainbow display).

  In this manner, in the effect image in the operation effect instructing the player to operate the operation button 30, the character “Press the button!” Varies in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in step S249 shown in FIG. By being displayed, the player's motivation corresponding to the operation of the operation button 30 can be stimulated, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 46, step S273 is performed using one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C set in step S270. By executing the above process, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns such as normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2 according to the reach state. . Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set in step S268, the process of step S273 is performed using any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C set in step S271. By executing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In addition, in response to the determination to reach the reach state in step S268 shown in FIG. 46, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S273, the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used to perform step S276. By executing the process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach” is determined. In addition, it is determined that the reach state is not set in step S268 shown in FIG. 46, and the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect in step S273. In response to the determination, by executing the process of step S276 using the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance to execute a specific effect. Is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  In this way, even when the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, for example, it is possible to execute specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “intro”, and “end of development opportunity”, thereby enabling various effects. This can improve the game entertainment. Further, in the processing of step S273 and step S276, depending on whether or not the determination to reach the reach state is made in step S268, the change pattern type and the change pattern are determined using different determination tables, and the reach state is determined. The determination process does not compete between the case where it is set and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used to determine the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, Further, the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the variation pattern can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. As a result, the amount of processing in the processing executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 (for example, the main random number value updating processing in step S14 shown in FIG. 41) is reduced, and the program The amount can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration by preventing the configuration of the random number circuit 104 from becoming complicated and increasing the storage area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the like. . Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. In the processes in steps S275 and S276, regardless of the result of determination of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. Thereby, the amount of programs can be reduced as compared with the case where determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 15A, the non-reach CA1-4 that executes a specific effect when the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured such that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type is low. As a result, when the number of reserved data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, It is possible to reduce winnings in which the start condition is not satisfied.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design. Can be improved.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (F) and FIGS. 11 (A) to 11 (C), according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of big hit types, The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined. This makes it possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 10A to 10F and FIGS. The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether or not the state is a certain variation state. Thereby, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, different types of performance operations can be executed, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In the first special symbol display device 4, a plurality of game balls are awarded based on the fact that the first start condition is established after the game ball has won the first start prize opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start condition is established. A special game that variably displays a special symbol to be the first special graphic of the type is executed. In the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting condition is satisfied, A special figure game is executed which variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of second special figures. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, in the special game using the first special figure and the second special figure in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Corresponding to the variable display, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, the CPU 103 included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 follows a program read from the ROM 101, for example, a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process for controlling the progress is executed. On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control mounted on the effect control board 12 follows the program read from the ROM 121, for example, in the command analysis process of step S405 shown in FIG. 50 or the effect control process process of step S406, etc. The process for controlling the display state of is executed. Then, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition is determined, or the second starting condition is established. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special diagram based on the determination is determined, the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Thus, after the variation pattern type is determined using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. By doing so, various rendering operations can be executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. On the other hand, even when a special symbol is variably displayed by a plurality of display devices such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display, the variation is changed. Numerical data indicating a common random value MR3 is used for determining the pattern type. As a result, the amount of processing in the processing (for example, the main-side random value updating processing in step S14 shown in FIG. 41) executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 is reduced, and the amount of program is reduced. Can be planned.

  The production control CPU 120 performs the first hold display increase update setting in step S154 shown in FIG. 51, and performs the second hold display increase update setting in step S155, so that the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. 52, if either the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command that is the starting opening winning designation command is normally received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the start winning memory display area 5H, the first reserved memory number, which is the number of stored data in the first special figure storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition, and the second one based on the establishment of the second start condition. The second reserved memory number that is the number of stored hold data in the 2 special figure hold storage unit 151B can be displayed in an identifiable manner. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the progress of a game correctly.

  Further, the CPU 103 causes the first start winning prize designation command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S206 shown in FIG. 43, and then causes the pending storage number notification command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S209. In addition, after the second start winning port designation command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S215, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S218. Here, in the case where it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one production control command together with the total number of stored data that is the total number of stored data, for example, the total reservation When the upper limit value of the stored number is “8”, it is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. . On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The production control CPU 120 performs display update setting when no start opening winning designation is made in step S156 shown in FIG. 51, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the starting opening winning designation is performed. Based on the determination that neither the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command as the command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is predetermined. The display mode is changed to a gray display as shown in FIG. 52B, for example, so that the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number cannot be specified. Can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the command transmission / reception operation that is performed to display the total number of reserved memories that is the total number of stored pending data.

  When it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is the variation pattern that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in the processing of steps S551 and S552 shown in FIG. 56, the specific effect pattern is set to the pseudo-continuous TP2 in step S554. 53 shown in FIG. 53 in accordance with the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S517 of FIG. 54 in accordance with the determination to be any one of −1 to quasi-continuous TP2-3 or the temporary stop symbol determined in step S558. The decorative pattern changing process of S162 is executed. Thus, based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After all the decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is possible to execute a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the effect display changed again is performed a predetermined number of times. Then, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 46, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S270 for use in the determination in step S273. ~ 135C, any of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after executing the specific effect of "pseudo-continuous" Table data is configured so that it can be determined. In this way, for example, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By determining the variation pattern type using the decision table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation unlike the design. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, for example, the CPU 103 opens the grand prize opening in step S251 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the maximum number of times is set to “15”, the process is controlled to the 15-round big hit state by executing the processing of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has set the maximum number of winning prize opening number to “2” in step S251 shown in FIG. Then, the process is controlled to the two-round big hit state by executing the processes of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. Then, based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “surprising” in step S249 shown in FIG. 44, the big hit variation pattern type set in step S262 for use in the determination in step S273 shown in FIG. In the tables 132D, 132H, and 132I, for example, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 variation pattern type is “accurate”. The table data is configured so as to include a variation pattern type different from the case of other than the above. In this way, when the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or the fluctuation pattern is different from that other than “surprise accuracy”. Despite being controlled in the round big hit state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by performing the same production operation as in the case of being controlled in the 15 round big hit state.

  Based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 executes the small hit release process in step S118 and the small hit release process in step S119 shown in FIG. Similar to the two round big hit state, the special variable winning device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player, and a variable winning operation is executed. Then, when the small hit gaming state is ended, for example, by not changing the state of the probability change flag or the short time flag in the small hit end processing of step S120 shown in FIG. 42, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed. . Thereby, even when the normal state continues, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for being controlled to the probability variation state and improve the game entertainment.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 10 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 11 (B), and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. The table data is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, and the expectation for being controlled to the probable state is maintained. Can improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine the common variation pattern type, so that the variable pattern can be determined Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types in steps S508 and S509 shown in FIG. 55, and finally stops according to the determination result. The decorative design that is the design is determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of confirmed decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of jackpot types are selected based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. The table data is configured so that the rate at which the big hit type is determined to be “accurate” differs from the case of determining whether or not. Thereby, the player's expectation for being controlled to the two round big hit state according to which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied can be made different, and the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, when the second start condition is satisfied, the big hit type is not determined to be “surprising accuracy”, so that the big start winning opening is easily controlled in the wide open state such as the probability changing state or the short time state. It is possible to prevent the gaming interests from deteriorating when the type is “accurate”, and it is possible to increase the frequency at which award balls are paid out in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  The CPU 103 can specify the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 41 based on the transmission setting in step S279 shown in FIG. A variable display result notification command and a variation pattern designation command capable of specifying a variation pattern are transmitted. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect setting process in step S516 shown in FIG. And a presentation action that becomes a notice presentation effect is determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in step S593 shown in FIG. 58, the notice pattern type determination table 170 as shown in FIG. 34 is used to determine one of a plurality of notice pattern types. At this time, the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 are determined. If any one of the notice patterns is determined in step S595, one of the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is set in step S595. decide. Then, the symbol variation control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined in step S517 shown in FIG. 54 corresponding to the specific effect pattern and the notice pattern determined based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. Accordingly, the decorative symbol variation process of step S162 shown in FIG. 53 is executed. Thus, the control for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the side of the main board 11 by making the decision or setting for executing the notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like mounted on the effect control board 12. While preventing the burden from increasing, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by performing various presentation operations as a notice effect.

  In the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34, the table data is configured so as not to execute the notice effect having the execution period overlapped with the specific effect, for example, when the specific effect of “Intro” is executed. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a plurality of types of performance operations from overlapping, and to prevent a decrease in performance effects due to the player's interest being dispersed.

  In the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 27C, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, the intro is determined depending on whether the previous effect buffer value is “1” to “3”. The allocation of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to each specific effect pattern of TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is different, and is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” executed last time. Table data is configured so as not to be a specific performance pattern. As a result, a variety of performance operations can be caused to appear without causing bias, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 and the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the notice effect can be executed even in the case of the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach”. The table data is configured. As a result, even if the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach state, it is possible to execute the effect operation that becomes a notice effect, thereby enhancing the player's expectation for reaching the reach state and improving the game entertainment Can do.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 37, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a variation pattern in which the reach state is reached. The ratio of executing the notice effect is lower than that of the time, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that of the change pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. Table data is configured. This reduces the case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed, and the case where the specific effect is not executed when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed. By further reducing, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for reaching a reach state when a notice effect is performed, and to improve the gaming interest.

  In the case where the “mail display” notice effect is executed in the decorative symbol changing process of step S162 shown in FIG. 53, the player operates the operation button 30 within the button effective period, and the operation button 30 accordingly. When the operation detection signal transmitted to the effect control board 12 is turned on, for example, the effect control CPU 120 switches the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 to the notice CYP3-2-2. By displaying the effect image YH2, the effect operation in the notice effect is changed. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within the button effective period, the notice effect control pattern is not switched, the effect image YH1 is erased, and the notice effect is ended. As described above, when the operation button 30 is operated during the execution of the “mail display” notice effect, the operation button 30 is operated such that the subsequent “mail display” notice effect displays the effect image YH2. By being executed in a mode different from that when it is not performed, the mode of the notice display effect of “mail display” can be changed according to the operation of the operation button 30, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 54 based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and the like. By executing the processing of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 55, the final decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Decide on. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S558 shown in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S576 shown in FIG. 57 to determine the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the changing promotion effect. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Deciding the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the plurality of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side. Can do.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 56 when a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, thereby combining the temporary stop symbols that become one of the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8. To decide. Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of step S558 shown in FIG. . Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  In response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state, the effect control CPU 120 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C to be stopped are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last is determined. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. By determining the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed with reference to 161, the combination of reach and jackpot is not achieved, and even if it is not the reach combination or jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B, sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Determine the combination of finalized decorative symbols. Thereby, it can prevent giving a player a misunderstanding about whether a special effect is performed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 is the “first probability variation” jackpot type capable of executing the changing promotion effect, in step S513 shown in FIG. 55, the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination decide. Then, in step S574 of FIG. 57, it is determined whether to execute the changing promotion effect by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. At this time, if it is determined that the changing promotion effect is to be performed, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. The decoration design to be temporarily stopped by the promotion effect during change is determined. Thus, even when the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect is provided, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by enabling various performance operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game.

  In the case of the “third probability variation” jackpot type that executes the jackpot promotion promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines a final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination in step S512 of FIG. . As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether or not to be controlled to the probable change state from the variable display result of the decorative symbol when the notification effect that the probable change state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started. Thus, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the notification effect and improve the game entertainment.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step S608 shown in FIG. 60 that the successful promotion of jackpot promotion is performed, after the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped is re-varied, the probability variation jackpot combination is always set. In the above description, it is assumed that the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the jackpot promotion effect is being executed, the player operates the operation button 30 within the button effective period, and the effect control is performed from the operation button 30 accordingly. When the operation detection signal transmitted to the substrate 12 is turned on, the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, while the operation button 30 is not operated within the button effective period. In such a case, a fixed decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. In such a case, it is only necessary to perform an effect operation that becomes an ending promotion successful effect in the ending effect process of step S166 shown in FIG. In this way, when the operation button 30 is operated during execution of the jackpot promotion effect, an operation button is displayed in which a confirmed decorative symbol that is a promising jackpot combination is stopped and displayed for the subsequent jackpot promotion effect. Since the mode of the jackpot promotion effect can be changed according to the operation of the operation button 30 by being executed in a mode different from the case where the operation of 30 is not performed, the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  In the above embodiment, when the determination result of the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10B or the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 10E is selected as the use table, and the jackpot type determination result is “first probability variation”. In this case, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 10B and the big hit variation pattern shown in FIG. When one of the type determination tables 132F is selected as the use table and the determination result of the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state Depending on which of the short-time state, either the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 10C or the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in FIG. 11A is selected as the use table. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different big hit variation pattern type decision tables are used when the big hit type decision result is “normal” and “third probability variation”. It may be selected as a table, or when the determination result of the jackpot type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, a common variation pattern type determination table for jackpot May be selected as the use table.

  As an example, when the determination result of the jackpot type is “normal”, the allocation of the random value for determining the variation pattern type to the super CA 3-2 is super CA3-3, super CA3-4, super CA3-6, A setting is made so that a larger jackpot variation pattern type determination table is selected as the use table than the total of the allocation of random number values for variation pattern type determination to the super CA 3-7. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the allocation of the random number value for determining the variation pattern type to the super CA 3-2 is super CA3. -3, setting is made so that a big hit variation pattern type determination table is selected as a use table, which is smaller than the sum of the allocation of random value for determining the variation pattern type for super CA3-4, super CA3-6, and super CA3-7 To do. With such a setting, when the determination result of the jackpot type is “normal”, the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 such as super PA4-1 to super PA4-8 are set in the process of step S276 shown in FIG. The ratio determined for the variation pattern to be executed is based on the ratio determined for the variation pattern for executing the reach effect γ1 and the reach effect γ2 such as Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-4, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-4. Also gets higher. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, in the process of step S276, super PB4-1 to super PB4-4 and super PB5— 1 to a change pattern for executing reach effect γ1 and reach effect γ2 such as super PB5-4, etc., and a change pattern for executing reach effect α1 and reach effect α2 such as super PA4-1 to super PA4-8. Will be higher than the rate determined. In other words, the variation pattern is determined at a different rate depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “normal” or one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”.

  For this reason, in the decorative symbol changing process of step S162 shown in FIG. 53, the effect operations in the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2 are executed, and the reach effect is developed in the first mode in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other. Compared to the case where the effect is not performed, the effect operation in the reach effect γ1 and the reach effect γ2 is executed, and the form of reach effect fights the ally character and the enemy character from the first mode in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other. In the case of being developed into the second mode, the expectation for being controlled to the probability change state after the end of the big hit gaming state is higher. As a result, it is possible to give a different expectation to the player to be controlled in a promiscuous state after the end of the big hit gaming state, depending on how the reach production has evolved, thus improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  In the above embodiment, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 performs the reach effect α1 in which the operation effect is not performed, the reach effect β1, and the reach effect γ1 in step S276 shown in FIG. It has been described that whether or not to execute the operation effect is determined depending on which one of the reach effect α2 in which the operation effect is performed, the change effect pattern in which the reach effect β2 and the reach effect γ2 are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not to execute the operation effect on the effect control board 12 side. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, the change pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the change pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the change pattern for executing the reach effect β2, and the reach effect γ1 are executed. The variation pattern for executing the variation pattern and the reach effect γ2 is a common variation pattern. On the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the predetermined operation effect execution in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 of FIG. It may be determined by referring to the effect execution determination table.

  In the above embodiment, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the super PB 3-6, either the super CPB 3-6-1 or the super CPA 3-6-2 is displayed in step S517 shown in FIG. Is selected and set as the usage pattern, and if the variation pattern is Super PB5-1, either the design variation control pattern of Super CPB5-1-1 or Super CPB5-1-2 is selected as the usage pattern. To be set. If it is determined in step S352 shown in FIG. 59 that the operation button 30 has been operated within the button operation effective period, the super CPB 3-6-1 and super CPB 3-6-2 are super CPB 3-6. -3, the super CPB 5-1-1 and the super CPB 5-1-2 are switched to either the super CPB 5-3-1 or the super CPB 5-1-3-2. If it is determined in step S357 that the button operation valid period has passed without the operation button 30 being operated, the super CPB 3-6-1 and the super CPB 3-6-2 are super CPB 3-6. The super CPB 5-1-1 and the super CPB 5-1-2 are switched to either the super CPB 5-1-1-1 or the super CPB 5-1-4-1.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a symbol variation control pattern in which super CPB 3-6-1 and super CPB 3-6-3 are integrated, or super CPB 3-6-1 and super CPB 3-6. -4 is integrated with the symbol variation control pattern, Super CPB 3-6-2 and Super CPB 3-6-3 are integrated with the symbol variation control pattern, Super CPB 3-6-2 and Super CPB 3-6-4 Symbol variation control pattern, and super CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-3-1, symbol variation control pattern, super CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-3. -2 integrated pattern variation control pattern, Super CPB5-1-1 and Super CPB5-1-4-1 integrated Dynamic control pattern, super-CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-4-2 are integrated, and the super-CPB5-1-2 and super CPB5-1-3-1 are integrated. Design variation control pattern, super CPB5-1-2 and super CPB5-1-3-2 integrated, supermarket CPB5-1-2 and super CPB5-1-4-1 integrated One of the symbol variation control patterns and the symbol variation control pattern in which the super CPB 5-1-2 and the super CPB 5-1-2 are integrated is set as a use pattern in step S517 shown in FIG. You may be made to do.

  As an example, in the process of step S517 shown in FIG. 54, in response to the variable display result designated by the variable display result notification command, the presence / absence of the changing promotion effect determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Of the integrated symbol variation control patterns, a combination of a symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the button operation and a symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the button operation may be set as the use pattern. . Specifically, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is Super PB5-1, the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is “normal”, and in step S574 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the changing promotion effect is executed, in step S517 shown in FIG. 54, the design variation control pattern in which the super CPB 5-1-1 and the super CPB 5-3-1 are integrated with each other. The design variation control pattern in which the super CPB 5-1-1 and the super CPB 5-1-1 are integrated is set as a use pattern. Further, when the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is “normal” and it is determined not to execute the changing promotion effect in step S574 shown in FIG. 57, in step S517 shown in FIG. , A design variation control pattern in which super CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-3-2 are integrated, and a design in which super CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-4-2 are integrated. The variation control pattern is set as the usage pattern.

  On the other hand, the jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and the changing promotion effect is executed in step S574 shown in FIG. Is determined, in step S517 shown in FIG. 54, the symbol variation control pattern in which the super CPB 5-1-2 and the super CPB 5-3-1 are integrated, the super CPB 5-1-2 and the super CPB 5-1-2. A symbol variation control pattern in which CPB5-1-4-1 is integrated is set as a usage pattern. The jackpot type designated by the variable display result notification command is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and it is determined not to execute the changing promotion effect in step S574 shown in FIG. 54, in step S517 shown in FIG. 54, the symbol variation control pattern in which the super CPB 5-1-2 and the super CPB 5-1-3-2 are integrated, the super CPB 5-1-2 and the super CPB 5-1. What is necessary is just to make it set as a usage pattern the symbol fluctuation | variation control pattern which 4-2 integrated. Note that the effect control process timer setting values shown in the two sets of symbol variation control patterns set in the process of step S517 shown in FIG. 54 are common. Subsequently, in the process of step S518, an initial value of the effect control process timer is set corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value common to the two sets of symbol variation control patterns set in step S517.

  Then, before the button operation valid period elapses without the operation button 30 being operated or before the button operation valid period elapses without the operation button 30 being operated, the process of step S356 shown in FIG. Various control data corresponding to the timer determination value are read out from one of the two sets of symbol variation control patterns set in the process of step S517. Here, when various control data are read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the button operation in the process of step S356 shown in FIG. 59, when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, In addition, various control data is read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the button operation, and when the button operation effective period has passed without the operation button 30 being operated, the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the button operation not thereafter Various control data may be read out from. On the other hand, when various control data is read out from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to no button operation, when the button operation valid period elapses without the operation button 30 being operated, the button operation is not performed thereafter. Various control data are read from the symbol variation control pattern to be performed, and when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the various control data is read from the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the button operation thereafter. do it.

  Further, in the process of step S517 shown in FIG. 54, the symbol variation control pattern in which the super CPB 3-6-1 and the super CPB 3-6-3 are integrated, or the super CPB 3-6-2 and the super CPB 3-6-3. Symbol variation control pattern, and super CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-3-1, symbol variation control pattern, super CPB5-1-1 and super CPB5-1-3. -2 integrated symbol variation control pattern, super CPB5-1-2 and super CPB5-1-3-1 integrated symbol variation control pattern, super CPB5-1-2 and super CPB5-1 Any of the symbol variation control patterns integrated with -2 may be set as the usage pattern. In this case, when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the process of step S358 shown in FIG. 59 is skipped, and the symbol variation set in step S517 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just not to switch a control pattern. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the symbol variation in which the super CPB 3-6-1 and the super CPB 3-6-3 are integrated in step S353 shown in FIG. The control pattern, super CPB 3-6-2 and super CPB 3-6-3 are integrated into a single pattern fluctuation control pattern to super CPB 3-6-4, super CPB 5-1-1 and super CPB 5-1-3- 1 is integrated with the symbol variation control pattern, Super CPB 5-1-1 and Super CPB 5-1-2 are integrated with the symbol variation control pattern, Super CPB 5-1-2 and Super CPB 5-1-1. 3-1 is integrated with the symbol variation control pattern, Super CPB5-1-2 and Super CPB5-1-3-2 Super CPA5-1-4-1 according to pattern variation control pattern of the presence or absence in the promotion effect variation may be to switch to one of the super CPA5-1-4-2.

  Further, on the contrary, in the process of step S517 shown in FIG. 54, the symbol variation control pattern in which the super CPB 3-6-1 and the super CPB 3-6-4 are integrated, or the super CPB 3-6-2. Symbol variation control pattern in which super CPB 3-6-4 is integrated, symbol variation control pattern in which super CPB 5-1-1 and super CPB 5-4-1 are integrated, and super CPB 5-1-1 Symbol variation control pattern in which Super CPB5-1-4-2 is integrated, Symbol variation control pattern in which Super CPB5-1-2 and Super CPB5-1-4-1 are integrated, Super CPB5-1 Any of the symbol variation control patterns in which 2 and the super CPB 5-1-4-2 are integrated may be set as the usage pattern.In this case, when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the process of step S353 shown in FIG. 59 is skipped, and the symbol variation set in step S517 shown in FIG. What is necessary is just not to switch a control pattern. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the symbol variation in which the super CPB 3-6-1 and the super CPB 3-6-4 are integrated in step S358 shown in FIG. The control pattern, super CPB 3-6-2 and super CPB 3-6-4 are integrated into a single pattern variation control pattern, and switched to super CPB 3-6-3, super CPB 5-1-1 and super CPB 5-1-4- 1 is integrated with a symbol variation control pattern, Super CPB 5-1-1 and Super CPB 5-1-2 are integrated, Super CPB 5-1-2 and Super CPB 5-1 4-1 integrated pattern variation control pattern, super CPB5-1-2 and super CPB5-1-4-2 integrated Super CPA5-1-3-1 according to pattern variation control pattern of the presence or absence in the promotion effect variation may be to switch to one of the super CPA5-1-3-2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the command for opening the big prize opening for the 15th round and the designation command for opening the big prize opening are separately provided as the command A1XXH and the command A2XXH, respectively, It has been described that the designation command during opening of the prize opening and the designation command after opening the big prize opening are provided separately as command A4XXH and command A5XXH, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening opening designation command for 15 rounds big hit and the designation command after opening the big winning opening, the large winning opening open designation command for sudden / small winning, The command specified after opening the big winning opening may be a common command. In this case, for example, in addition to the number of executions of the variable winning action in the round or small winning game state, the big winning opening is in the open state. Different EXT data may be set in accordance with whether it is in the closed state or the closed state.

  In the embodiment described above, for the big hit control effect processing in step S164 shown in FIG. 53 and the small hit control effect processing in step S165, for the 15 round big hit or the sudden hit / small hit transmitted from the main board 11. When the number of executions of the variable winning action in the big hit gaming state specified in the big winning game opening specified command, etc. or in the small hit gaming state is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of executions is switched. As described above, the description has been made on the assumption that the performance operation that is the effect during the big hit is changed according to the number of executions of the round winning in the big hit gaming state and the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3, and special PG3-1 to special PG3-1 through the processing of step S517 shown in FIG. The symbol variation control pattern corresponding to any of the variable display patterns of the special PG3-3 and the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1, hit control CRE1-1, and hit end CED2-1 are integrated. A design variation control pattern corresponding to an effect control pattern or a variable display pattern of any of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3, special PG3-1 to special PG3-3, One of the effect control patterns in which the hit start CST2-2, hit control CRE1-2, and hit end CED2-2 are integrated is set. 53, the decorative symbol variation processing in step S162 shown in FIG. 53, the decoration symbol variation end processing in step S163, and the big hit control effect processing in step S164, or the small hit control effect processing in step S165. Thus, a series of performance operations may be performed. In this case, in the big hit control effect processing in step S164 shown in FIG. 53 or the small hit control effect processing in step S165, even if a big winning opening opening designation command for sudden hit / small hit is received, By not switching the effect control pattern, it is only necessary to prevent the effect operation that is the effect during the big hit from being changed.

  In the above embodiment, when the reach effect β2 and the reach effect γ2 are executed, if the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period in step S352 shown in FIG. Then, the first mode in which the friend character and the enemy character face each other is developed into a second mode in which the friend character and the enemy character who are more advantageous to the player than this mode fight. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within the button effective period, it has been described that the reach effect mode is not developed in the first mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of modes different from the first mode and the second mode are separately provided, and depending on the reliability (possibility that the variable display result is “big hit”). Different modes may be developed. For example, in the case where the third aspect having a lower reliability than the second aspect but having a higher reliability than the first aspect is provided and the reach effect β2 and the reach effect γ2 are executed, in step S352 shown in FIG. When the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the reach effect is developed from the first mode to the second mode, while the operation button 30 is not operated within the button effective period. In such a case, the reach effect mode may be developed from the first mode to the third mode. Furthermore, a fourth mode having higher reliability than the second mode is provided, and when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the fourth mode may be developed into either the second mode or the fourth mode. Good.

  In addition, when the reach effect α2, the reach effect β2, and the reach effect γ2 are executed, the ratio of the aspect of the reach effect to be developed differs depending on the character color of “Press the button!” In the operation effect. Good. For example, when the letters “Press the button!” Are displayed in red, there is a ratio that the reach effect mode is not developed in the first mode when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period. When the character “Press the button!” Is displayed in yellow when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the reach effect mode is changed from the first mode. The ratio of development to the third mode which is more advantageous than the first mode but disadvantageous than the second mode and the fourth mode is set to be the highest. Further, when the letters “Press the button!” Are displayed in yellow, when the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation valid period, the reach effect is changed from the first mode to the first mode. The ratio of development to the second mode, which is more advantageous than the third mode but disadvantageous than the fourth mode, is the highest, and the text “Press the button!” Is displayed in rainbow colors with a gradation display (rainbow display). When the operation button 30 is operated within the button operation effective period, the reach effect mode is more advantageous than the first mode to the third mode from the first mode, but the fourth mode. It is sufficient that the rate of development is the highest.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the process of step S593 and the process of step S595 shown in FIG. The determination as to whether or not to execute the operation and the presentation operation as the notice effect are determined to be any of a plurality of types, and the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 54, and step S510 shown in FIG. By executing the processing of S512 and S513, and further the processing of step S558 shown in FIG. 56 and the processing of step S576 shown in FIG. 57, the decorative symbol display areas 5L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. It has been described that the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at 5C and 5R are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the effect operation, for example. The determination as to whether or not to execute, the determination of any one of a plurality of effects as the notice effect, and the determination of the decorative pattern to be stopped may be executed in a shared manner.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 72 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 140, a ROM 141, a RAM 142, a random number circuit 143, and an I / O 144 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 140 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 140 executes a program read from the ROM 141, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 140 reads fixed data from the ROM 141, the display control CPU 140 writes various variation data to the RAM 142 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 140 stores the RAM 142 in the RAM 142. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU 140 receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board 16 via I / O 144, display control CPU 140 I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O144 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 140, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, the process of step S593 shown in FIG. By executing the process of step S595, it is determined whether or not to perform an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols, and whether or not the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is to be selected from a plurality of types. You may make it perform. Alternatively, the display control CPU 140 performs the processing in steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 54, the processing in steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 55, the processing in step S558 shown in FIG. 56, and the step S576 shown in FIG. All or part of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by executing at least a portion of the processing of May be determined. The display control CPU 140 may execute any part of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above-described embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU and the like, but the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the processing executed by the CPU 120 for effect control in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type with respect to the jackpot type of “surprise” The case where -1 is not assigned has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. May be. In this case, depending on whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the number of random number values MR2-1 for determining the big hit type assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” is varied. Thus, when determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition, and determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. Depending on the case, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “accurate” may be different.

  In the above embodiment, the variation patterns classified by the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. The table data has been described as being configured so that it can be determined as one of the types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table can be determined as any one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of a predetermined effect operation such as a specific effect of “Development Opportunity” and a promotion effect during change. Data may be configured.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the start winning memory display area 5H, blue display is performed when the first start condition is satisfied, and red display is performed when the second start condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a round symbol is displayed when the first starting condition is satisfied, and a triangular symbol is displayed when the second starting condition is satisfied. The symbol may be displayed. Alternatively, a number indicating the number of times each of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 27B in step S554 of FIG. 56, and the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3. In the above description, it is assumed that the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is set to any one of “1” to “3” depending on which one is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation is determined when the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern in step S276 shown in FIG. It may be. In this case, a different special figure variation time can be set according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation. As described above, for the case where the special figure change time changes depending on the presence or absence of the production operation, the presence or type of the production operation is determined on the main board 11 side, and the special figure fluctuation time does not change depending on the presence or absence of the production operation. With respect to the effect control board 12, the presence / absence and type of the effect operation may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice pattern type in step S593 shown in FIG. 58, after determining the notice pattern type including presence / absence of the notice effect, the notice is notified in step S596. In the case of determining the pattern, the description has been given on the assumption that the notification pattern is determined including the presence or absence of the notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice pattern and the decision of the notice pattern may be determined in a single process. If it is determined that there is an effect, the type of the notice effect may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the reach combination in step S506 shown in FIG. 54, it stops together with the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The decorative symbols to be displayed are determined, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It was explained that the difference in design was also determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display area 5C stops display, and the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R stop display. For example, the CPU 103 may determine the design difference from the decorative design on the main board 11 side along with the determination of the variation pattern, and notify the effect control board 12 side by a predetermined effect control command.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S505 shown in FIG. 54, refer to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right appearance determination table 161. In the above description, the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  In the above embodiment, when executing the changing promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 as shown in FIG. 33 in step S576 shown in FIG. When the symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are determined so that the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become the determined decorative symbols that constitute the normal jackpot combination, the determined decorative A description has been given assuming that a normal symbol different from the symbol can be determined as a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become a fixed ornament symbol constituting a normal jackpot combination, the same normal symbol as the fixed ornament symbol However, it may be determined as a decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. As an example, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 169, any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 is displayed. In the case of the above, all of the random numbers SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect are assigned to any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” that are the same as the final stop symbol. The table data only needs to be configured so that the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are the same as the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. .

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 42, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value SR3 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  For example, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach variation pattern type determination table, the first start condition and the second Depending on which of the start conditions is satisfied, different allocation of the random value SR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type may be prepared in advance. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on SR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the common random number SR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, different processes are executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state is made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while numerical data indicating the reach determination random number value MR2-2. For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Further, for example, in place of the process in step S249 shown in FIG. 44 in the above embodiment, the process of determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types is performed when the first start condition is satisfied and the second start condition Different processing may be executed depending on whether or not is established. In this case, the processing for determining the jackpot type is different depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied.

  In the above embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 includes table data that assigns the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type to the “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” jackpot types in accordance with the variable special figure designation buffer value. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may be. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, after the big hit gaming state, the high accuracy high base state and the high probability low base state It may be controlled either. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, the high-accuracy high base state and the high-accuracy low base state are You may make it make the ratio controlled to either differ mutually.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. As an example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S249 shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state is finished. The determination process for performing is performed. At this time, when it is determined to control to the high-accuracy low base state, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1 variation pattern type is “surprise”. A common variation pattern type is determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, when it is decided to control to the high-accuracy high-base state, it is dedicated only when the big hit type is “surprise” such as special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. The change pattern type may be determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display result is displayed as an effect operation during variable display of the decorative pattern or an effect operation in the two round big hit state. After the production operation common to the case of “small hit” is performed, the highly accurate and low base state can be obtained. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit type is “surprise” After the dedicated performance operation is performed only in the case of “

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are described as being prepared as separate effect control commands. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to specify a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “small hit”, “big hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). One kind of effect control command may be used. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in step S249 shown in FIG. 44 selects any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Based on the determination, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 sets the big hit promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 28B in step S606 shown in FIG. 60, and step S608. In S609, it has been described that it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect may be performed by the effect control CPU 120 regardless of the determination result in the CPU 103.

  In the embodiment described above, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three locations of “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” are provided. It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the specific effect is executed in response to the fact that the variation pattern type is determined as the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It has been described as being determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7. That is, it has been described that the presence or absence of the specific effect is determined by determining the variation pattern type using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of the specific effect may be determined by determining the variation pattern using the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. As an example, the table data of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is set so that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 include the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1. In this case, when the variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the presence / absence of the specific effect is still determined. First, it is determined that the specific effect is not executed by determining the non-reach PA1-1 based on the random value MR4 for determining the change pattern, while the change pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach. Execution of a specific effect is determined by being determined as one of PA1-7.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... Display control board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121, 141 ... ROM
102, 122, 142 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124, 143... Random number circuits 105, 125, 144... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 140 ... Display control CPU

Claims (2)

A control can be a game machine to an advantageous advantageous state for Yu technique's,
And Ru determined Teisu determine means for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state,
When determining the effect is not controlled in the preferred state is made by the previous Kike' constant means, and reach determining means for determining whether the variable Henhyo shows a reach state,
Based on the previous Kike' determination result determination result by the reach determining means by the constant unit, and the variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern to one of a plurality of types,
Based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining means, a notice effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined notice effect;
And executes the variable display based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining means, when the decision to execute the prediction effect by the prediction effect determination unit is made, executes the prediction effect during variable display Production execution means to perform,
Operating means that can be operated by a player,
The effect execution means executes any one of a plurality of types of operation effects instructing the player to operate the operation means at different ratios depending on the degree of expectation , and operates the operation means during the advance notice effect. when is performed, it performed in a different manner than when the informational display, the manipulation is not performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.   When the first variable display pattern is executed based on the determination result by the variable display pattern determining unit, the effect executing unit executes the reach effect in the first mode and the operation effect, and then performs the operation Based on the operation of the means, the aspect of reach production is developed from the first aspect to the second aspect,
  When executing a second variable display pattern different from the first variable display pattern, the reach effect of the first aspect is executed and the operation effect is executed, and then the operation means is operated. The aspect of reach production is not developed as the first aspect,
  When executing a third variable display pattern different from the first variable display pattern and the second variable display pattern, the reach effect of the first aspect is executed, and the reach effect is performed without executing the operation effect. Performing in the first aspect,
  The gaming machine according to claim 1.